License Agreement
PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY. By using the software supplied with this licence (the “Software”) you agree to be bound by the terms of this licence.
This is a license, this product is not sold.
THIS IS A NON TRANSFERABLE LICENSE, granted to the end user, by GENESIS PTY LTD Registration (hereinafter called GENESIS) with its mailing address at PO Box 199, Patong, Phuket. Thailand. 83150. The software marketed as AUTO EASY ULTIMATE is licensed to you as the user. It is not sold.
I. COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
Australian copyright laws and international copyright treaties protect this software program, and any documentation. By using this software, you acknowledge that you have read, understood, and agree to be bound by the provisions of this license.
II. LICENSE, COPY AND USE RESTRICTIONS
GENESIS licenses (not sells) the AUTO EASY software to the end user, for use on any computer for which the software was designed This means that GENESIS allows you to use the software on a single machine. You may not use the software in a multiple computer, multi-user, or network arrangement without prior consent from GENESIS.
You may not remove the GENESIS copyright notices from any manuals or software provided. All copies, together with the original, must be kept in control of the location it is provided to.
You may not make any changes or modifications to the software, you may not delete any of the files contained in the software, and you may not decompile, disassemble, or otherwise reverse engineer the software. The software is not for sale. You are not to sublicense, rent, lend, lease, donate, sell, loan, pledge, transfer, or distribute copies.
III LIMITED WARRANTY
1.0 GENESIS warrants that the media on which the software is recorded and the documentation provided with it are free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. GENESIS warrants that the software itself will perform substantially in accordance with the specifications set forth in the documentation provided with it.
1.1 The above express warranties are made for a period of 3 months from the date the software is delivered to you as the user.
Obligations of GENESIS during the warranty period:
1.2 GENESIS will replace any media, which proves defective in materials or workmanship, without additional charge or on an exchange basis.
1.3 GENESIS will either replace or repair without additional charge, any software that does not perform in substantial accordance with the specification in the documentation. Delivering to you a corrected copy of the software or corrective code will do this.
1.4 If GENESIS is unable to replace defective documentation or defective media or if GENESIS is unable to provide a corrected copy of the software or documentation within a reasonable time, GENESIS will refund the license fees paid for use of the software.
Exclusion and Disclaimer of Other Warranties:
1.5 GENESIS does not warrant that the functions contained in the software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free. The warranty does not cover any media or documentation, which has been subject to damage, or abuse by you. The software warranty does not cover any copy of the software, which has been altered or changed in any way by you or others. GENESIS is not responsible for problems caused by changes in the operating characteristics of the computer hardware or operating system, which are made after the delivery of the software.
1.6 EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED HEREIN, GENESIS MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN THE CASE OF A USER OF THE SOFTWARE WHO IS A CONSUMER WITHIN THE MEANING OF THE TRADE PRACTICES ACT:
(i) Except for any other conditions or warranties issued in writing by GENESIS and except for those conditions and warranties implied by the Trade Practices Act or other sale of goods or consumer protection legislation which may not be excluded you agree that there are no additional implied conditions or warranties herein or collateral contracts herewith (except such as may be in writing and signed by a duly authorised representative of GENESIS);
(ii) to the extent that the goods or services the subject of these provisions are goods or services of a kind not ordinarily acquired for personal, domestic or household use or consumption (within the meaning of the Trade Practices Act) the liability of GENESIS to you for breach of warranty or condition (other than a warranty or condition implied by section 69 of the Trade Practices Act) or for breach of any duty of care shall in all cases be limited at the option of GENESIS in the case of goods to any one or more of the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods, the repair of goods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods or the payment of having goods repaired and in the case of services to the supplying of services again or the payment of the cost of having the services supplied again and (without limiting the foregoing) shall not include any liability in respect of or arising out of or in connection with any special consequential direct or indirect loss, damage, harm or injury suffered or incurred as a result of such breach.
Your obligations under the Warranties:
1.7 You must call GENESIS’s support line for an authorisation to return any defective item during the warranty period. If GENESIS's customer service representative is unable to correct your problem by telephone, you will be provided with a return authorisation number and an address for returning the defective item for warranty service or replacement. You must insure any defective item being returned because GENESIS does not assume the risk of loss or damage while in transit.
Other Conditions:
1.8 The warranties set forth above are in lieu of all other express and implied warranties, whether oral, written, or implied, and the remedies set forth above are your sole and exclusive remedies. Only an officer of GENESIS may make modifications to this warranty, or additional warranties binding to GENESIS. Accordingly, additional statements such as advertising or presentations, whether oral or written, do not constitute warranties by GENESIS and should not be relied upon as such. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have additional rights, which may vary from country to country.
IV. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW GENESIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT, IN ANY EVENT, BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES, EVEN IF GENESIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall GENESIS’s liability exceed the license fees paid for the right to use the licensed software.
V. INTEGRATION
This license including the full text of the Limited Warranty and the Limitation of Liability, constitutes the entire agreement and understanding between the parties and supersedes any prior license or understanding whether oral or written, relating to the subject of this license. This license may only be modified by a written agreement signed by Genesis Pty Ltd.
You may use the software as long as you like provided you do not violate the copyright and you follow the above rules.
Title to the software, related documentation, and any copies are retained by GENESIS PTY LTD.
Copyright © 2002 Genesis Pty Ltd. All rights reserved
Genesis Pty Ltd
PO Box 1484
Fremantle
Western Australia 6959
When you keep books for a business or organisation, you want to track where your income comes from, where you put it, what your expenses are for, and what you use to pay them. You track this flow of money through a list of accounts called the chart of accounts. Accounts include the follwing:
¨ Balance sheet accounts
¨ Income accounts
¨ Expense accounts
¨ Cost of goods sold accounts
¨ Non-posting accounts (includes purchase orders and estimates and does not appear on your balance sheet)
Some of these accounts are created for you automatically for example, the first time you create an invoice or statement charge, Auto Easy automatically creates an accounts receivable (A/R) account. Other accounts you'll add, at any time you can create and modify your accounts as needed.
Types of accounts
Your chart of accounts includes balance sheet accounts. These accounts track the following:
¨ What you have (assets)
¨ What people owe you (accounts receivable)
¨ What your company owes to other people (accounts payable and other liabilities)
¨ The net worth of your company (equity)
¨ Retained Earnings (profit carried forward from previous tax years)
The following table describes the various types of Auto Easy balance sheet accounts.
Balance sheet account type |
Auto Easy account type |
Use to track |
Asset |
|
What you have and what is owed to you |
|
Bank |
Transactions in cheque or savings accounts. Add one bank account for each account your business operates. You can also use this type of account for cash purchases. |
|
Accounts Receivable (AR) |
Transactions between you and your customers, including invoices, payments from customers, deposits of customer payments, refunds, and credits. Accounts receivable is automatically created. |
|
Other Current Asset |
Assets that are likely to be converted to cash or used within a year, such as the value of your stock on hand. |
|
Fixed Asset |
Represents the depreciable assets your business owns that aren’t liquid such as equipment, furniture or a building. |
|
Other Asset |
Any asset that is neither a current or fixed asset |
|
|
|
Liability |
|
What your company owes |
|
Accounts Payable (AP) |
Comprises of outstanding bills. When you first enter a bill, Auto Easy creates an AP account |
|
Credit Card |
Credit card transactions for your business purchases or expenses |
|
Other Current Liability |
Liabilities that are scheduled to be paid within the next 12 months, such as GST, payroll liabilities and short-term loans. |
|
Long Term Liabilities |
Liabilities such as loans or mortgages scheduled to be paid over periods longer than 12 months. |
|
|
|
Equity |
|
Net worth of your business |
|
Equity |
Comprises of the following: v Investment of capital in the business by the owners v Net profit from operating the business during the current financial year that have not been distributed to the owners v Retained earnings, or net profits from earlier periods that have been carried forward into the current financial year. |
Balances for balance sheet accounts
The Chart of Accounts window shows a balance for each balance sheet account (except for the special equity account, Retained Earnings). In Auto Easy, each balance sheet account has its own register, just like your bank account register. The register shows every transaction for that account, as well as the account balance.
Income and expense accounts
Income and expense accounts track the sources of your income and the purpose of each expense. When you record transactions in one of your balance sheet accounts, you usually assign the amount of the transaction to one or more income or expense accounts. For example, not only do you record that you took money out of your current account, but also you keep track of what you spent the money on.
There are no registers for income and expense accounts, but your can create reports to show totals for these accounts over a period of lime.
Cost of goods sold (COGS) account
The account type "cost of goods sold" (or COGS or cost of sales) is grouped with income and expense accounts even though it is a separate account type. Many businesses have one cost of goods sold account, which is similar to an expense account. COGS contain all expenses that are direct costs of your sales, such as items for a job or inventory. When you use inventory items to track purchases and sales of inventory, Auto Easy automatically calculates the cost of goods sold every time you sell an item.
The value and performance of your company can be summarised by two reports: The balance sheet and profit and loss statement. How you set up your chart of accounts will greatly influence the level of detail you record on these reports
Your Business’s Balance Sheet
A balance sheet is a financial snapshot of your company on a selected date basis. This report is useful when applying for a business loan or at year-end to get an accounting of your business’s equity, assets and liabilities.
The income statement shows the performance of a business over a period of time. Income is reported for a month, quarter, year or some other period of time. The income statement lists your income, cost of sales, and expense accounts. (Cost of sales and expense accounts are very similar. Businesses use the two different account types to discriminate between costs directly related to sales and the costs of running a business) Cost of sales and expenses are subtracted from income to calculate the profit (or loss) for the period. this is why the income statement is also called a profit & Loss Statement. Where the Profit & Loss Statement meets the Income Statement There is one link between the two financial statements It is an important link and a key concept The net profit or loss of the Income statement is automatically posted to the equity section of the balance sheet.
Double-entry accounting is the accepted method of accounting worldwide. Double-entry accounting, as the name suggests, requires two entries for every financial event, but what is an entry? An entry is made when you assign an amount to an account.
If you were to put $100 in the company cheque account, the entry would look like this:
Account Amount
Company Cheque $100.00
However, this entry reflects only one side of the transaction. It doesn't tell you where the money came from. If this $100 originated from the sale of a tyre, the entry would look like this:
Account Amount
Tyre Sale $100.00
These two entries when put together, make up one double-entry that looks like this:
Account Amount
Company Cheque $100.00
Tyre Sale $100.00
As you can see, you now have a double entry, reflecting where the money came from and where it went. This is the basic function of double-entry accounting.
Once you’ve mastered the different account types and the two financial statements. The next concept to learn is debits and credits. In double-entry accounting, every dollar amount is categorised as either a debit amount or a credit amount. And each of the six account types - asset, liability, equity, income, cost of sales, and expense -is classified as either a debit account or a credit account. Asset and expense accounts are called debit accounts because their balances are usually debit amounts. The other four account types are credit accounts because their balances are usually credit amounts.
A good working knowledge of credits and debits is helpful, but not required to use Auto Easy Ultimate. In almost every transaction, Auto Easy calculates the correct debit and credit amounts for you
Because debits and credits do not follow any obvious rule, it is difficult to remember which accounts normally have a credit balance and which normally have a debit balance. If you remember that assets are debits it will follow that liabilities and equity are credits. If you remember that sales are credits it will follow that cost of sales and expenses are debits
On the balance sheet, assets - things you own-are good and are debits. Liabilities - things you owe are bad and are credits. On the income statement, income accounts – money in - are good and are credits Expense accounts - money out - are bad and are debits, The following chart shows the accounts and the sign they carry
Account |
Normal Sign |
Description |
Assets |
Debit |
All the things a business owns |
Liabilities |
Credit |
All the things a business owes |
Equity |
Credit |
The difference between what is owned and what is owed |
Income |
Credit |
The money charged for products and / or services |
Cost Of Sales |
Debit |
The direct cost of products and / or services sold |
Expenses |
Debit |
The money charged to operate the business |
Conclusion
As you might have guessed double entry accounting can and has caused a great deal of confusion. A single entry appears simple but as different types of entries are added to the business’s books, the system gets more difficult and complex to understand. Auto Easy Ultimate has been designed to minimise the complexities of double entry accounting, however it is still helpful to have a basic understanding of the principles applied.
Tax Reporting – Cash & Accrual Accounting Methods
An accounting method is a set of rules that determines when and how you report your income and expenses for tax purposes.
Cash basis
Many small businesses track income at the time they receive the money, and expenses when they pay the bills, This method is known as bookkeeping on a cash basis If you've been recording deposits of your customers' payments but have not been including the money customers owe you as part of your income, you've been using cash basis. Similarly, if you've been tracking expenses at the time you pay them, rather than at the time you first receive the bills, you've been using cash basis.
Accrual basis
In bookkeeping on an accrual basis, you record income at the time of the sale, not at the time you receive the payment. Similarly, you enter expenses when you receive the bill, not when you pay it. Accountants usually recommend accrual basis because it gives you a better picture of how your business is doing.
The choice is yours
Auto Easy makes bookkeeping really simple by enabling you to enter transactions the same way no matter which method you use for taxes. At any time you can create tax reports that follow either method, so you are not "stuck" with one method.
Hardware & Software Requirements
To run Auto Easy Ultimate, you need the following equipment and software:
v IBM OR 100% compatible computer running a Pentium 1GHz Processor (or higher).
v Minimum of 512MB (megabytes) of RAM (random access memory).
v Hard disk dive with a minimum of 500MB free space
v CD-ROM Drive minimum 10 speed
v SVGA monitor or better; capable of displaying a minimum of 256 colours and 1024 x 768 resolution.
v 56k Modem, ISDN, ADSL or satellite connection
v Windows 2000, ME, Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7including Internet Explorer 6.0 (or higher) or
Netscape for accessing Internet services.
v Microsoft Word 6.0 (or later version) & Excel 97 (or later version) if you plan to export data to
Microsoft applications
v Printer, including specified driver loaded with defaults set to A4 page size
Auto Easy Ultimate network requirements are the same whether you are sharing a company file or printing to a network printer:
v Windows Server or Terminal Server to share the company file
or
v Peer-to-Peer network using Windows XP or Vista
Additional Sever Requirements for Multi-User Network
v Pentium 1Ghz Processor (or higher)
v 512MB RAM (Random Access Memory)
v Hard disk with 500MB free space
Multi-User Installation Requirements
Auto Easy Ultimate for multiple users must be licensed for each machine. You must have a copy of Auto Easy Ultimate loaded on each of the computers you plan to network. Each user should have read/write access and create/delete rights to the directory where the company file is stored. Check your network software for instructions on how to get your computers networked and how to give each user read/write access. If your Auto Easy Ultimate CD is mounted on a server or shared CD-ROM drive, you can install from the mounted CD, but you cannot install across the network to a remote computer. That is, you must be sitting at the computer you're installing to, but you should store the company file on the shared resource.
For peer-to-peer network users
Peer-to-peer networks are networks that do not use a dedicated file server. This means that all the computers on the network have the option to share their resources. There is not one machine that is used only to allow other computers to share files. An example of a peer-to-peer network would be two or more connected computers running Window 95, Windows 98, Widows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 or ME.
It is important that each computer use a unique copy of Auto Easy Ultimate installed with a unique unlock code; these can be obtained from Genesis Pty Ltd.
It is important that yon choose one location for your company file. The location you choose should be accessible from all of the computers that need to use Auto Easy Ultimate. Yon may want to put the company file on the computer of the person who uses Auto Easy Ultimate the most. This allows that person to have the fastest access to the Auto Easy company file.
For client-server network users
Client-server networks are networks in which there is at least one computer dedicated to sharing files, printers, or other resources. This computer is usually not used by individuals to do their daily work.
In a client-server network, you will most likely put the company file on the server in a location that is accessible by all of the computers that need to use Auto Easy Ultimate. Each computer, except for the file server, must have a copy of Auto Easy Ultimate installed with a unique Unlock code unless you are using a terminal server in which case only one unlock key is required.
Insert the CD into your drive, the install program will execute automatically. Select install when prompted – The default directory is C:\Program Files\Auto Easy Ultimate, if you wish to copy the files to a different location select the change directory option during the install.
When all the files have been copied, you maybe requested to restart your computer. Please select restart before attempting o run Auto Easy Ultimate.
To open the program select the desktop icon Auto Easy Ultimate or start / programs / Auto Easy Ultimate.
Either selection will start the program for the first time; You will need to create a new database or open the existing training file AA Automotives, To open the training data select open existing database and select AA Automotives from the file selection. To create new databases enter a numeric site id. (max 8 characters – (DO NOT USE ALPHAS). Next enter your site name and de-select the default parts, services, categories and chart of account options if you do not want to use them.
Note Windows Vista Installs – Version 2.5.2 or higher prompts the user to select a modified installation process when loading Auto Easy Ultimate onto Windows Vista. Please note it is not possible with this operating system to maintain the integrity of our program when updates are provided if Auto Easy is loaded in the Program Files folder
Fig 2.01 Selecting Database On Opening |
A registration box is displayed before the opening screen. The registration can be bypassed; however the product will only run for 30 days after which you will have to contact Genesis Pty. Ltd. for a registration code.
If you wish to send communications to your clients you will need to install a copy of Word for Windows 2000 or later to perform mail merge functions. Auto Easy through the database extract function has links to this Microsoft product
If you wish to create a new site enter a four digit number into the site id field (no alphas) followed by the business name in the trading name. You can also choose to load the default databases.
|
A registration box is displayed before the opening screen. The registration can be bypassed; however the product will only run for 30 days after which you will have to contact Genesis Pty. Ltd. for a registration code.
If you wish to send letters you will need to install a copy of Word for Windows95 or later to perform mail merge functions. Auto Easy through the database extract function has links to this Microsoft product.
Importing Data
It is possible to import data from Auto Easy 2000 (© Genesis Australasia) directly into Auto Easy Ultimate. There are 2 options available:
1) No Transactions: Enter the cut-off date (usually the current date), do not select the recreate transaction option, and select the import button. You will need to choose the directory that you are importing data from although this will default to the C:\Workshop directory if this exists on your machine. Messages will be displayed as the data is converted to Auto Easy Ultimate Format.
The no transaction option will import your databases from Auto Easy 2000 into Auto Easy Ultimate; there will however be no transaction history, debtors opening balances will have been converted and any receipts will have been deposited to a suspense account (Bank).
2) Import Transactions: To import databases and associated transactions select the recreate transactions option, the cut-off date when choosing this option should be the date up to which you have paid your creditors and banked receipts. These values will be credited and debited to a suspense account. There will be some editing required when opening your data for the first time. It is suggested you contact Genesis for advice on how to do this as it will vary according to each import.
Registering Auto Easy Ultimate
Firstly you will need to Provide Genesis with the 16 alpha / numeric program code generated on installation. Genesis will provide you with a unique unlock code for the program plus additional codes for bar code scanning and fleet management if required. On receiving the unlock codes there are 2 ways to register your program:
1) From the registration box that is displayed as an unregistered copy is loaded – Enter the unlock code provided into the appropriate field
2) From the opening screen select File / Registration – The registration box is displayed a red cross at the end of a line indicates that the program or module is not registered. A green tick indicates a successful registration
To save your registration key select OK at the bottom of the registration display.
Fig 2.02 Program code & Registration key |
Registration keys are unique and apply ONLY to the computer the program is installed on, if for any reason you need to reload the program contact Genesis for a new set of registration keys. If you are operating on a network each machine will require a separate registration key. Please ensure you retain these codes in a safe place for future reference.
|
Printer Settings: Select Site / Printer Settings from the drop down menu, you have the option to print to two machines. The report printer will print job cards and all other reports, the invoice printer will only print invoices (suggested if you use letterhead stationery). The report and invoice printers can be the same if multiple units are not in use.
Fig 2.03 Printer Settings |
Printer Selection: Auto Easy allows you to connect three standard and one receipt printer. Select the required printer by clicking on the arrow to the right of the report printer field. Highlight the device and double click the details are displayed. Perform the same process for the invoice and job card printer.
Job Card & Invoice Format: There are 3 types of job card and 7 types of invoice formats it is suggested that you select each type and test print to determine which layout you wish to use.
Using Letterhead Stationery: Selecting will not print the site / location address and phone details on the invoice. The header spacing can also be adjusted by entering values into the allow field.
|
Print Logos On Invoice: If you wish to customise the display convert your logo into a JPEG or BMP file and copy into the Working directory\logos folder. To select the logo flag the print logos on invoice selection, the drop down list will be displayed. Point to the required file and double mouse click, the file name is displayed in the logos field.
Merge Services On Invoice: When selected does not define fixed price & mechanical services.
Duplicate Invoices: Allows the operator to automatically print two copies of the invoice with sign-off text being printed on the client’s copy. To enter the text required access Messages / Invoice Sign-Off Text.
Hide Tax Codes: Set this to true if you don not want the tax codes displayed against each line item on the invoice.
Print Part Numbers: Select if you wish to print these on your invoice
Print Full Retail Price: Select if you wish to print these on your invoice
Prompt For Number Of Copies: If you wish to be prompted to print more than one copy of a form select the prompt
Bar Colour: Auto Easy allows you to customise the invoice header bar colour, to select point and click on the colour field and select from the displayed grid.
Prompt For Printer When Printing: Selecting this option will allow the operator to select another printer other than the default.
Receipt Printer: Auto Easy allows you to attach a slip printer to a designated com port, select the down arrow to the right of the receipt printer field, point and click on your selection. A print job will be sent to the slip printer when a cash sale is performed or a payment is received. To initialise these functions point and click in the appropriate check box at the bottom of the printer settings form.
Other Invoices: It is possible to print invoice to the receipt printer – no work description or vehicle faults are printed when selecting this option. Select from the option your preference. |
|
Once your site is created and your printer settings have been customised you need to configure the site settings, the following notes guide you through the process
Till Draw
Auto Easy Ultimate allows you to attach a serial till draw that needs to be connected to a coms port on the local machine (if you are running a LAN). To set-up a till draw perform the following:
Connect a serial till draw to a coms port on your computer
1) Open settings from the file menu, select printer settings 2) Point and click in the enable till check box 3) Select the port your till draw is connected to from the menu 4) Save the settings with OK (F12) 5) Test the till draw operation by pressing the F9 key |
|
Till Draw, Opening: When the till function is enabled a second OK function is added to the payment receipt form, if you wish to open the till draw as you finalise a sale select the till draw icon or press the F9 key.
Settings, Accessing: You will need to set your site preferences before using the program, from the opening screen select file / settings. The display is tabulated with six choices:
v Site Details
v Database Settings
v Accounts
v Local Settings
v Online Settings
Site Details
Fig 2.04 Settings / Site Details |
Trading Details: Enter your trading details including email address into the fields provided. Enter your suburb and press the enter key, your postcode and state will automatically be inserted into the appropriate fields.
RTA #: If you have a registration number that needs to be printed on the invoice enter details into the RTA field.
Text Messages: Auto Easy allows you to enter four text messages that are printed at the bottom of the invoice, client statement, sign off / authorisation and receipts. A fifth option tab is available to enter terms and conditions for the loan car contractTo enter messages click on the tab type your text into the appropriate field. On printing the text lines are automatically centered on the form. Save your changes by selecting OK (F12).
|
Database Settings
Fig 2.05 Program Options |
Customising: Selecting Database Settings allow you to customise various features of Auto Easy by pointing and clicking in the checkbox next to listed feature.
The selections are categorized into the following:
General Options
Cost Centre
Security
Date Lock
The notes in this section will describe the use of each feature.
|
General Options
Keep Track OF FP Service Parts For Make/Model: Will display parts on the invoice based on make / model and service for previously performed services
Track Loyalty Points: If you are operating a loyalty program mouse click in the appropriate field. When using the loyalty program member’s invoices display a statement of points to date.
Hide Hours On Service (Default) – When this option is selected the hours for each service are not printed on the clients invoice.
Track RSA: This feature allows you to issue roadside assistance to your clients if you intend using support services.
RSA Contact Number: If you are issuing roadside assistance to your client base type in the contact number, which will be printed on the invoice. If you are using support services the number will be supplied to you. RSA issue details are printed on the invoice if this feature is selected.
Auto Procedure On Job Close: If selected will automatically lead the operator through Hours allocation & Service Reminders. Service reminders and labour allocation can be selected manually if required.
Auto- Format Text: Capitalises the first letter of each word regardless of the cap locks setting.
Alternative Price Display In Parts & Services Lists: Displays MRRP, retail, wholesale, trade and recommended retail prices including GST.
Step By Step Booking Process: Initialises the automated booking process from the diary screen.
Rounding On Invoices: Selecting rounding on invoice, rounds the invoice value to the nearest zero or five cents. The adjustment is posted to an other income account; it is displayed in the financial summary of the job card and printed on the final invoice
Buy- Ins Must Be Allocated To Jobs: Selection ensures that all buy-ins (items specifically for jobs) are allocated to an open job card. When this option is selected it will no longer be possible to enter buy-ins onto a supplier invoice without a job allocation.
Service Text Goes To Service Comments On Job Card: This feature allows you to further customise your invoice layout by placing text attached to services into the service comments field so it is printed below the service rather than in the work done field.
Use Employee Cost Per Hour For Profit Report: Auto Easy automatically calculates the cost per hour for technicians by dividing the total value of hours sold for the past 90 days into the total payroll for technicians over the same period. If you wish to overwrite this feature select this option it is now possible to enter a manually calculated labour cost per hour against each employee from the employee form, this value is applied when running a profit report from the job card.
Insert Carriage Return Between Text Lines: Selecting this option will place a carriage return between the lines of text when selections are made from the work done or vehicle faults data.
Calculate Diary Tech Time From Estimated Hours: Select this option if you wish the diary hours available table to calculate from estimated time rather than technicians allocated times.
Estimated Hours Reminder For Jobs Over Multiple Days: Selection will remind the operator to edit estimated job times for the day based on jobs carried forward from previous periods
Warn For Future Dated Transactions: If this option is set to true when a future dated transaction is entered you will be prompted whether you wish to continue or not,.
Adjusting Default Booking Hours – To adjust the default booking hours (set at 2) open File settings select the database settings tab. From the bottom of the form select the method you wish to use as a default booking time. There are two options hours or time, save your changes by selecting OK (F12) from settings.
|
|
Security
Security Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate allows you to set different access permissions for each user; on first installation the security feature is inactive. This feature is used in two ways.
Firstly, as a way of securing sensitive information ie: you may not wish your technicians to be able to view your chart of accounts, banking functions or financial reports. You would however give permission to your office staff to perform bill payments, make deposits and create client credits. Auto Easy allows you to set the permissions for each employee, who is then assigned a unique log in and password. When operating on a network it is possible to have different users logged onto the terminals with only the permissions for the terminal operator being applied.
Secondly, as a management tool for the in built task manager, using security allows you to set-up appointments and tasks by user or user group. When logged in a user will only be able to view that individual’s appointments and tasks. Security permissions also allow you to establish whether the user is able to enter tasks or appointments for other users.
If you wish to use the security function it will have to be enabled from the configuration screen.
Note: It is important that you retain your password in a SAFE place as loss can cause operational problems. It is also suggested that you limit your password to a maximum of 6 characters so it is easy to remember.
Security, Log On: Once security is set you will need to log on to use the program, on start up a log in message is displayed, type the user name or select from the drop down list, enter the password and press enter or select OK.
Fig 2.07 Log In Display |
If a user attempts to access functions that have not been selected in the security profile an access denied message is displayed. It is however possible to change a users access at anytime by selecting File / Settings / Configuration / Manage Users. It is of course suggested that only the manager has access to the setting option to prevent unauthorized use of the program.
|
Provides the operator with the ability to lock records prior to a nominated date, to enable point and click in the check box then select the button to the right of the date field, from the calendar select the lock date by double clicking in the grid, save your settings, you will not be able to edit any records prior to the selected date. It is however possible to change your settings or disable the feature at anytime
Cost Centre
Track Cost Centre: Allows you to select a cost center and default authorisation for purchases and track via the purchase transaction report. To set-up cost centres you will need to add an entry to the list and also have at least one user setup.
Accounts
Fig 2.09 Accounts |
Customising: The accounts tab allows you to setup various accounting functions within Auto Easy; these are categorized in the following way:
Default Parts & Service Accounts
Default Payment Accounts
Banking Details
Tax
Credit Card Surcharges
Default Payroll Payment
The notes below describe the use of the options available |
Default Parts & Service Accounts
Default Accounts: Parts – Income, Parts – COGS, Services – Income, select the accounts you wish to apply as the default. Clicking on the button to the right of the field will display the chart of accounts, highlight the record you wish display by selecting OK (F12) from the bottom of the account list.
Default Payment Accounts
Auto Easy allows you to attach default accounts to receipt and payment media selections. You may wish for all your cash and cheque receipts to be posted to undeposited funds, EFT and credit cards to a clearing account. Accounts can also be selected for payment types ie: Cheques can be attached to your main trading account, cash to cash on hand or undeposited funds.
To setup select Accounts Payable or Accounts Receivable tab, point and click on the button to the right of the account field a list of your payment / receipt accounts is displayed. Select the account you wish the transaction to be posted to finalise with OK (F12), the name of the account is displayed in the account column.
Default Payroll Payment: To record a default wage account open settings from the file menu click on the accounts tab. Select the payment media and account from the drop down menu. Save your settings by exiting via OK or F12
Fig 2.10 Default Payment Accounts
Banking
Options allow you to set up your bank details to print on deposit slips. Nominate a default bank account (this is normally your main trading account).
Tax
Auto Easy Ultimate allows you to store multiple tax codes, which can include varying rates of tax or exemptions. You can also select a code to be your default in most cases this will be GST.
Tax Codes, Selecting: To view tax codes or select a new default code mouse click on the button to the right of the default tax code field:
Fig 2.11 Selecting or creating a new tax code |
Auto Easy allows you to set up multiple tax codes that apply varying rates of tax to specified items. Highlight the tax code you wish to make the default and select OK the code will display in the default tax code field. The default CAP Tax code when selected will post purchases to G10 – Capital purchases on your BAS. |
Tax Codes, Creating: Select new from the bottom of the display the tax details display consists of the following fields:
v Tax Code: Insert a unique code for the tax
v Rate: Record the rate of tax to two decimal places (do not enter a % sign, this inserts automatically)
v Description: Include a description for the tax ie: Wholesale, GST, Exempt
v Account: Allows you to allocate the tax to a sub account of tax payable, you may wish to separate the various taxes that apply to your business. If you wish to apply a tax in this way you will need to set up the sub account in the chart of accounts.
Fig 2.12 Creating tax codes |
You can apply different tax codes to parts, services and expenses. The taxes can be allocated to one account ie: Tax Payable / GST or you can create individual tax accounts. Auto Easy gives you the option to view values over a date range by tax code.
This option is helpful if you handle the liability differently to your default tax code. An example is private vehicle use that may not be tax deductible any expenses that you apply to a unique tax code can easily be tracked |
Tax Included As Default: Select this option if you wish the cost and retail prices to default to tax included, leave blank if you wish the default to be ex. Tax.
Tax Year Start: Enter the start month of your tax year, if you are starting to use Auto Easy Ultimate during the tax year you still need to enter the tax start month in this field. If this is not entered correctly it will impact on your financial reports.
PAYG Installments: If you are liable for PAYGI enter the % rate into this field, PAYGI is calculated on sales excluding GST and is visible as a total in Tax Payable / PAYG Installments posting in the chart of accounts.
|
Auto Easy allows you to setup different percentage surcharges for four credit card types. When a value is entered and you choose to process a client payment via credit card a selection field is displayed, simply select the credit card type and the percentage is added to the total payment when printing a receipt – Note the receipt is titled tax invoice for taxation purposes. The surcharge is also recorded in the payments section of the client card. |
Local Settings
Fig 2.13 Settings / Local Settings |
Customising: Local settings allows for further customisation To the following functions:
Backup
Printer
Default Parts List Display
Diary Job Screen Sorting
Reset Picklists
The following notes describe how set each function
|
Back-Up On Program Closes
The option allows you to select two drives for the backup purposes. This is usually a directory on the hard drive plus a removable drive ie: USB Flash Disk or CD ROM. To chose the backup locations select the button to the right of the field; from the navigation window select the drive you wish to write to and click on OK (F12). Perform the same for the second location, when backing up to removable media you must ensure the drive is available before exiting the program.
Printer Settings
Selecting this option will open the printer settings – see printer settings for details.
Default Parts Display
Allows you to select which part type you wish to set as a default
Diary Screen Job Sorting
Select whether you wish the order of jobs on the diary screen to be by job number or client.
POS Interface
Genesis in conjunction with Computer Vision have developed a basic link to the Quick Fuel POS system, if you have this application installed and wish to link with Auto Easy select the checkbox and search for the Quick Fuel company file by clicking on the button to the right of the file location field, this action will allow you to navigate your PC.
Reset Picklists
Option allows you to set you list configuration to the optimum for your chosen resolution – please not you will have to exit the program and re-enter for the settings to be visible
Online Settings
Fig 2.14 Online Settings
|
Customising: The online settings option is configured in the following way:
Replication
SMS
Remote Group
Parts Update
The following notes describe how to use each function.
|
Replication
Overview: Replication is used to transfer data to a central server for data analysis (organisation dependant) and or central database marketing (generation of client communications & roadside assistance). Before data can be transferred the replication process has to be set, plus you will also need the machine to have access to the Internet via dial-up or broadband. You will also need to set your browser to always dial your default ISP (For dial up connections only).
Replication, Settings: Select the replication tab at the top of the display – point and click in the enable replication for this database option.
|
Next you need to choose whether you wish to send 12 or 6 months data (6 months is sufficient unless notified by Genesis). You will now be able to select the 6 month option by pointing and clicking on the arrow to the right of the history field.
|
|
The next step is to select enable replication for this machine (For a site running a network this option should only be selected on one machine which has access to the internet). This will display the auto / manual options, frequency and replication time. It is suggested that the replication is performed on a daily basis, select a time which is suitable if operating on broadband select Automatic from the type field, for dial up users select manual, this option will display a message at the appropriate time reminding you to replicate – to initialize select yes from the message box. Select weekly or daily from the frequency field, time can be chosen from the table by pointing and double clicking. Save your settings
|
Replication, The First Connection: The first replication for sites that have 6 months of data will take a considerable time (faster on broadband) do not be alarmed by this as it is a “one off” process, once the first replication has completed the process should take no longer that a couple of minutes a day (dial up connections faster on broadband).
|
It is suggested that you manually initiate your first replication by selecting the on-line option from the top of your screen, point and click on the replication option. This will connect you to the server and start to replicate your records (10 passes in total). You will see a progress monitor in the form of a pink bar as the data is transferred.
On completion a message box (for dial-up users) will prompt to disconnect from the internet, select Yes if you wish to work off line. No message is displayed if you are using broadband.
|
SMS Messaging
Auto Easy allows the user to send SMS messages to single or multiple clients, for this feature to work you must have an internet connection plus an account and password from Genesis Australasia. Enter the account details into the fields provided.
|
If you wish to send a default text message to your clients on job card close select the Send SMS on job close option, point and click on the button to the right of the field, a list of SMS messages is displayed, select the one you wish to send and confirm by selecting the OK (F12) option at the bottom of the list. |
Remote Sites Parts Inquiry
|
The right hand side of the online screen allows the operator to setup single or multiple sites to contact to check stock on hand.
Before adding sites ensure that the remote and local site/s have replicated with the Genesis server. This only needs to be performed once to record the site id., if you do not intend to send any further data to the server turn the replication feature off after the initial replication.
Select add to enter a new site, type the site id. Into the field provided, save with OK (F12). Repeat the process for any other sites in the group. o finalise the setting select listen for requests on this machine, only one machine that has access to the internet on the network needs to have this option selected. Save your settings with OK (F12)
|
Parts Update
Enter the folder name for data uploads and price file updates, the software provider will assist you with these settings.
|
One of the main advantages to using Auto Easy is that as you create invoices, write cheques, and produce purchases orders; Auto Easy is literally you doing your bookkeeping. To make it easy to perform regular tasks, Auto Easy saves information on various lists so you don’t have to retype it each time you need it. For example, in the client list, you can save addresses, phone numbers, and payment terms that apply to a customer.
It is not essential for the operator to have a full understanding of the accounting processes as Auto Easy is programmed to allocate certain transactions to specified accounts, an example is parts and labour these are linked to an income account so there is no need to set the posting account. Likewise inventory purchases are posted to accounts payable and inventory asset accounts. It is however necessary for you to customise your chart of accounts to allow for specific postings. A standard chart of accounts is included in the data set of Auto Easy, the chart of accounts can however be changed to suit an individual business. Accounts can be deleted, edited or added.
You get out only what you put in
If you want to see detail on reports, be sure to track it somewhere in Auto Easy. For example, if Harry needs to know how his yearly travel expenses break down by airfare, lodging, and meals, first he needs to subdivide his expense account for travel expenses into three sub-accounts. Then he needs to break down his expenses each time he enters them into Auto Easy.
What you shouldn’t try to track in Auto Easy
There are some things that you should not try to track in Auto Easy:
v Personal finances: For tax purposes, it’s usually best to keep your business income and expenses completely separate from your personal income and expenses. (If you still want to track personal finances in Auto Easy, set up a separate site file for them.)
v Investments in shares or trusts: If the business owns these investments, you can track the cost basis as an asset. However, Auto Easy doesn’t have the investment tracking.
v Details that are not specifically related to your business accounting: For example, John needs to track when subscriptions expire so he can send reminder notices.
You can fine-tune your chart of accounts at any time by doing the following:
v Add new accounts or sub-accounts. You can add sub-accounts to balance sheet accounts (for example, fixed asset accounts) as well as to income and expense accounts.
v Delete accounts that have no transaction history
v Change the name of an existing account.
v Enter an opening balance for a new account
v Arrange accounts in order of account type or name
v Make one existing account the sub-account of another
Understanding The Account Types: Before customising your accounts it is important to understand what each account type represents:
Account Type |
Purpose |
Examples |
Accounts Payable |
What you owe suppliers and service providers |
Job parts and inventory purchases, what you owe for services rendered ie: accounting, window cleaning and consumables |
Account Receivable |
What your clients owe you |
Balance owing for jobs performed or parts and services provided |
Bank |
Cash you have available |
Relates to your trading account or cash on hand |
Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS) |
The cost of parts or services that you have on sold |
Includes parts taken from inventory, catalogue items or parts and services purchased for a specific job |
Credit Card |
Allows you track the transactions logged on your company credit card |
Purchases made for parts and services provided to your business |
Equity |
The net worth of the business |
Auto Easy has 2 standard equity accounts – retained earnings and opening balance equity. |
Expense |
Expenses you incur to run your business |
Examples are bank fees, electricity, rent and vehicle expenses |
Fixed Asset |
Items of plant or buildings your business owns |
Tools, office equipment, shelving or the value of a property from which you operate your business |
Income |
Parts and labour you have sold |
Items and services sold on cash, charge or job invoices |
Other Current Asset |
Other assets that are not registered as a standard asset |
Examples include stocks & shares, loans made to other companies or individuals |
Other Current Liability |
Liabilities other than purchases from suppliers and service providers |
Includes tax owing and loans made to your business |
Long Term Liabilities |
Liabilities, such as loans |
Includes non-current liabilities |
Other Expense |
Any expense that you decide not to allocate as an expense |
Examples may include personal expenditure |
Other Income |
Income that is generated from activity outside of selling parts and labour |
Can include items such as rent or interest received |
Chart Of Accounts, Accessing: From the top menu bar select lists / chart of accounts you can now view the standard chart of accounts and add, edit or delete (only non-system accounts and accounts that have no transactions applied).
Fig 3.01 Chart Of Accounts
Chart Of Accounts, Creating New Accounts: From the bottom of the accounts listing select new, this action opens the account details form enter the name of the account ie: Office equipment, account number (if you use these as references). It is possible to group account numbers by entering a dash in the record. If the account is a non-posting account (all master accounts should be set as Non- posting) enter NP or type Non-Posting into the account number field. Do not select non-posting accounts when processing transactions.
|
Fig3.02 Creating A New Account
Chart Of Accounts, Creating Sub Accounts: If you wish to attach an account to a master select the arrow to the right of the sub-account field. A list of accounts is displayed, highlight the account you require and double mouse click. The account will appear in your chart of accounts as a sub account. Ie Depreciation -- Hoist
You may want to use sub-accounts for two reasons:
v You want a further breakdown of amounts for an existing account. To accomplish this, set up sub-accounts of the existing account. From now on, use the sub-accounts instead of the parent account. (You may want to edit earlier transactions so the breakdown shows up on reports covering a period before today.) For example, suppose you have an Insurance expense. You add sub-accounts for building, equipment and personal
v You already have related accounts that you want to subtotal on reports (Or you may want to find them more easily). You set up a new parent account and then make the related accounts sub-accounts of the new parent.
Chart Of Accounts, Entering Opening Balances: Before entering your opening balances it is suggested you give some thought to how you want your chart of accounts to work for your business. If you require detailed reporting on any account you can set up sub accounts under a “parent” ie: you may wish to track the individual expenses related to running a motor vehicle in this situation you can create a parent account titled workshop utility and attach sub accounts to the “parent” which can include Fuel & Oil, servicing, insurance and lease payments. Using this method will allow you to report on each component that makes up the total running expenses of the workshop utility.
You may also wish to create individual accounts under fixed assets such as hand tools, hoist, computer system etc. Give some thought to items such a other liabilities these can include loans and taxes owing.
If you receive income from any other source that selling parts and labour set up specific accounts under other income, maybe you collect rent from a tenant if so this should be allocated to other income into an account titled rent.
Once you are satisfied with the structure of your chart of accounts you need to enter the opening balances into Auto Easy. The standard chart of accounts records a zero balance on all accounts, it is possible to add an opening balance to an account posting if it falls into the following:
§ It is a new account
§ A standard account that has a zero balance
An opening balance can only be entered once, however if you make a mistake you can adjust with a journal or funds transfer entry.
Default Tax Code: Selecting the button to the right of this field will display your tax code list highlight the record you wish to attach to the account and select OK (F12) to enter. You can only add tax codes to expense and fixed asset accounts. When posting to an account with a default tax code the system checks the code against the line item, if this does not match a warning message is displayed.
Your business’s equity comes from two sources:
v Money invested in your company (capital investments)
v Profits of your company
Of course, the owner can also take money out of the business. Such withdrawals, called owner’s drawings, reduce the company equity. Auto Easy sets up two equity accounts automatically:
Opening Balance Equity: For every balance sheet account you set up with an opening balance, Auto Easy records the amount of the opening balance in the Opening Balance Equity account. (Asset account opening balances increase the equity; liability account opening balances decrease the equity.)
Retained Earnings: If you have data for more than one financial year. The Auto Easy balance sheet has a balance for the Retained Earnings account equal to the net profit from prior financial years. The balance for the Retained Earnings account does not display on the chart of accounts.
Some people like to track owner investments, owner’s drawings, and retained earnings prior to the Auto Easy start date by putting them in separate equity accounts. If you decide to add additional equity accounts, Auto Easy still adds the Retained Earnings and Net Income lines on your balance sheet.
Equity accounts for sole proprietorships/trader
Since all the equity of a sole proprietorship/trader company belongs to one person, tracking equity can be very simple. As of your Auto Easy start date, all the equity is in the Opening Balance Equity account. Keep the equity in this account and perhaps rename the account to something like “Owner’s Equity.”
Note: When setting up a new account for owner’s drawings, enter a negative opening balance to show the total draws prior to the start date. The negative opening balance indicates that the draws have reduced the company’s equity. (Or, enter a zero opening balance and record drawings from now on)
Each partner may have invested in the partnership, and each receives a specified share of profits. Since partners are not employees, they don’t receive salaries or wages, but they may withdraw money against their share of profits. As of your Auto Easy start date, all the equity is in the Opening Balance Equity account. Set up separate equity accounts for each partner.
If you don’t want to see further detail, the opening balance for each partner’s equity account should equal the partner’s equity as of your Auto Easy start date. Since the company’s equity belongs to the partners, setting up new accounts should reduce the balance of opening balance equity to zero. Record each partner’s capital investment, drawings, and share of profits in the partner’s single equity account.
If you want to see further detail by adding sub-accounts, the opening balance for each partners “parent” equity account should equal zero.
(Optional) Add sub-accounts to provide the level of detail you’d like to see on the chart of accounts and on the balance sheet. For example, add sub-accounts for each partner’s investments, share of profits, and drawings.
In a company, you’ll usually want to separate the stockholders investment of capital from the stockholders’ share of earnings. To track paid-in capital or investments of shareholders, add an equity account with a name such as “Capital Shares.” Although you do need to have records of the names and investments of each stockholder, you probably won’t want to show this detail on your chart of accounts. For the opening balance, enter the total paid-in capital as of your Auto Easy start date. After you have set up all your accounts, the amount remaining in Opening Balance Equity represents retained earnings prior to the start date. You can rename this account with a name such as “Prior Earnings” or “Pre 1999 Earnings.” Auto Easy automatically tracks the company’s retained earnings for completed financial years in the Retained Earnings equity account. After the end of the year, you may distribute some or all of the retained earnings of the company to stockholders as dividends.
Journal Entries, Overview: During the course of business over a period of time you will make hundreds or thousands of accounting entries. To help you manage your accounts Auto Easy allows you to make journal entries. A journal entry is simply a way of changing the balances of accounts.
All journal entries are double sided comprising of a both a credit and debit entry to your accounts the balance of a journal entry must always equal zero. It a journal does not balance Auto Easy will not allow you to post the transaction.
Point at the field below the last account entry and mouse click, from the account list select the account you wish to make a debit entry to, we will select bank charges enter $20.11 into the debit column. The transactions now balance and the unallocated amount is zero.
Journal Entries, Using Tax Codes: You may need to allocate an amount to tax when processing certain journals. An example would be when adjusting a clients account to write off a bad debt, say the amount to be written off was $110.00 you would credit the clients account with $110.00 and split the opposing debit entry between an expense account ($100.00) and GST ($10.00).
|
To apply tax to a journal select the tax code field click on the down arrow, next point and click on the required tax code, the tax amount is automatically calculated and placed into the tax amount field. Tax is calculated on the value of the debit or credit entry entered on the same line.
Journal Entries, Adjusting Debtor And Creditor Accounts: Auto Easy allows you to adjust individual accounts assigned to accounts receivable (Debtors) and accounts payable (Creditors) with a journal entry. The entries are recorded in the bill payments (creditors) and Receive Payments (Debtors) forms, payments and receipts can be allocated to these transactions in the same way as process bills and invoices.
To adjust a debtors account select the button to the right of the account field, from the chart of accounts select accounts receivable, the name field can now be accessed, point and click on the button to the right of the field, from the client list select the client you wish to raise the adjustment for, select OK from the bottom of the client listing. The clients name is now displayed in the form.
If you wish to increase the balance of a debtors account place the value (in tax) into the debit column on the same line as the client’s name. Next select the account you wish to post to if there is a tax value enter the excluding tax amount to the debit column on the same line, to enter the tax value select the tax code and the calculated value is automatically entered in the tax amount field. Note: That the tax and debit or credit value can be changed, however the total credits must always be equal to the total debits for the transaction to be posted.
Journal entries are displayed in the following format on the bill payment and receive payment forms
Receipts (Debtors)
Bill Payments (Creditors)
Ticking the box at the end of the line allows the operator to allocate payments or receipts to a journal.
Note: It is best to view your chart of accounts pre and post when entering journals, this is an easy way to determine whether the transaction has debited and credited the correct accounts. Do not worry if you get it wrong Auto Easy allows for easy editing of journals.
Journal Entries, Editing: To edit a journal go to the general ledger by selecting the accounts / general ledger option from the top menu bar. Search for the entry you require, highlight and double click on the line item or select edit from the lower menu bar. You can now alter any of the details except the reference number.
Journal Entries, Deleting: Journal entries can be deleted from the journal form by selecting the delete function or the general ledger screen. If deleting from the general ledger use the transaction type filter to display only journal entries, your search can be further defined by the entering the date or transaction number. Highlight the transaction you wish to delete and click on the delete icon at the bottom of the screen. Only journal entries that have not been reconciled can be deleted.
Journal Entries, Viewing: Use the previous and next options at the bottom of the form to locate previous entries, if you wish to create more that one journal entry using the next option will open a blank transaction form.
Funds Transfer, Overview: Auto Easy allows you transfer funds from one account to another using the funds transfer feature. Fund transfers vary from a journal entry, you can allocate a media type from this form ie: cheque, cash, credit card or EFT.
Funds Transfer, Accessing: From the top menu bar select Admin / Transfer Funds, the transfer form is now in view. Alternatively transfers can be viewed from the general ledger screen by using the filter to select transfers. To view the details of a transfer highlight the line item and double mouse click or select edit from the bottom menu bar of the general ledger transaction display.
Funds Transfer, Transferring Between Accounts: You can transfer funds between any two balance sheet accounts in your chart of accounts. For example, you may need to transfer funds from a savings account to a current account to cover your weekly payroll.
1) From the Admin menu, choose Funds Transfer
2) Enter the amount you want to transfer
3) Select a media type from the drop down menu
4) Select an account to transfer funds from, and an account to transfer funds to.
5) Click OK.
Funds Transfer, Deleting A Transfer: Transfers can be deleted by selecting the delete option at the bottom of the display or by opening the general ledger screen highlighting the transfer you wish to remove and select delete from the bottom menu bar of the display.
Note: Only transfers that have not been reconciled or allocated on the bill payment or receipts form can be deleted.
Fig 3.04 Transfer Form |
The funds transfer form allows you to transfer money between accounts and allocate a media type. To make adjustments between accounts you should use the journal entry function.
Navigating Transactions: Use the previous and next buttons to scroll through transactions. If you wish to enter more than one transfer completing the transaction with next will open a blank form.
|
Overview: Auto Easy allows you to enter opening balances into any account type displayed in the account list, you will need to access this feature if you wish to transfer closing balances from your previous accounting system. Accounts payable and receivable values need to be allocated against each individual supplier and customer this is done by selecting a “special” entry from the parts listing and applying to a charge invoice for customers, for suppliers (accounts payable) create a bill and apply the current outstanding value via the add other option.
Opening Balances, Entering Values: To record an opening balance against an account select lists from the top menu bar from the menu select chart of accounts, if you wish to record a value against an existing account point and double click on the line item or highlight and select edit (F2). At the bottom of the display is the opening balance field, enter your amount and save with OK (F12).
Fig 3.05 Entering Opening Balances To Accounts |
The current balance field can only be used once to add an opening balance. An opening balance can’t be applied once transactions have been recorded against the account. If the current balance field is “grayed out” it is not accessible indicating that transactions have been recorded. The balancing account is opening balance equity, the account value will increase / decrease by the amount entered depending on whether it is a positive or negative balancing. |
Opening Balances, Debtors: It is necessary to create charge invoices for clients that owe you money. Auto Easy has a “special” entry DEBTORS (Part No. Field) displayed in the parts listing that needs to be applied to the charge invoice. The amount entered should be the total that the client owes. It is also suggested that the invoice is closed on the last day of the month the debt was incurred. To enter a client’s opening balance perform the following:
1) Select Invoices / Charge from the top icons (alternatively press F7)
2) Create the client if not already entered by selecting new from the bottom of the client listing entering the relevant details, save the client form by selecting OK (F12).
3) With the client highlighted select OK from the bottom of the client listing – A charge invoice is displayed.
4) From the charge invoice screen select add parts, search the listing for an item with the part number DEBTORS select and select OK from the bottom of the parts list.
5) Click on the value of the DEBTOR item at the end of the line and enter the outstanding balance. (GST applies if you are reporting on a cash basis, with accrual the tax code should be set to E for exempt – please check this with your accountant before proceeding).
6) Select Close from the bottom of the charge invoice
7) Change the date on the job close form to the last day of the previous month and select OK
|
The transaction is displayed in your sales screen; the balancing accounts are Accounts Receivable / Opening Balance Equity. |
Note: Do not change
the balancing account set-up on the DEBTORS item
Opening Balances, Creditors: On the opposite site of the ledger you need to enter the value of outstanding bills against each supplier, again this can be entered as a single value through purchasing. To enter outstanding values against suppliers perform the following:
1) Select the purchasing icon from the top of the screen
2) Select new from the bottom of the display, select your supplier, to make an entry select new from the bottom of the supplier list complete the details and save with OK (F12). Highlight the supplier and select OK; you are now in the bill form, enter OB (opening balance) in the Invoice / Ref # field. Change the date to the last day of the previous month.
3) Select the Add Other option from the body of the screen, highlight the CREDITORS OPENING BALANCES item and select OK (F12). A new entry is displayed on your bill.
Click on the value of the CREDITOR item
at the end of the line and enter the outstanding balance. (GST applies
if you are reporting on a cash basis, with accrual the tax code should
be set to E for exempt – please check this with your accountant before
proceeding).
Save the transaction by selecting OK (F12) from the bottom of the bill display – The amount can now be processed in the normal way. Note: Do not change the balancing account set-up on the CREDITORS item.
Diary, Overview: The Auto Easy diary allows you to view job status and technician labour allocations on daily or seven day basis. Information includes customer name, job status, start and finish times. For easy reference the job status field is colour coded. The diary can be used to log current jobs or future bookings; the 7 day view also displays a grid showing all invoices and cash sales. To view job, invoice or labour allocation details the operator simply mouse clicks on the record displayed.
Diary, Opening: To open the diary screen select the diary icon from the top menu bar
The
diary is accessible from all screens that display the top menu bar
The diary screen can be viewed in 3 modes:
v Jobs & bookings – 1 day view
v Jobs, bookings and open invoices – 7 day job view
v Technician labour allocation – 1 day view
Diary, View Selection: There are 5 control buttons on the top left hand bar of the diary screen that allow you to change the view.
To
change a view point at the required selection and left hand mouse click
1 2 3 4 5
v 1 = 1 day view
v 2 = 7 day jobs & bookings view including open invoices
v 3 = Jobs & Bookings
v 4 = Technicians Time Allocations
v 5 = Task Manager
Select whether you wish to view jobs or technicians allocations using button 3 for jobs, bookings & invoices or button 4 to view labour allocations, button 5 displays the task manager. Selecting button 1 displays one day selecting button 2 shows 7 days and open invoices in all modes.
Diary, Changing Days: To the right of the view selection are your date selection controls, you can select a date using the button to the right of the date field. From the calendar point and double click on the date required your selection will be entered into this field with the diary screen displaying records for the chosen date. It is also possible to manually enter a date by highlighting the current day field, selecting delete then typing the date you wish to move to in a DD/MM/YY format.
Positioned
to the right of the date field are the date controls
Date Field 1 2 3 4 5
v 1 = Back one week v 2 = Back one day v 3 = Always selects today v 4 = Forward one day v 5 = Forward one week
|
Refresh Option: The diary screen is refreshed each time the screen is closed and re-opened if you wish to refresh the screen without closing select the refresh option the to the right of the data selection |
Multiple selections will move the date forward or backwards a week or a day at a time depending on the control in use.
Date & Time Display-The current time and date is displayed in the top right hand corner of the diary screen
Booking Function: To the right of the date controls is the booking selection, to open the booking form point and mouse click.
To
enter a booking and create a job card select this button from the diary
screen
Jobs & Bookings, Day View: Records client and vehicle information representing the booking, work in progress or completed job by a time line in cells representing 15 minute time slots from 6.00am – 8.00pm. The time line changes colour according to job status.
|
If you wish to filter jobs by time point and left hand mouse click on the header of the start time cell, point and right hand mouse click on the finish time cell header – only jobs within the selected time frame are displayed in the diary list. |
Fig 4.01 Jobs & Bookings Day View
Colour |
Job Status |
When a job is closed the time line remains on the diary screen for the time the work in progress time although the colour will change to green indicating work completed. Work in progress moves forward to the next day and is indicated by a pink or red bar depending on job status. |
Blue |
Booking only |
|
Light Red |
Work in progress within allocated time |
|
Dark Red |
Work in progress outside of allocated time |
|
Green |
Work completed |
|
Orange |
Loan car booking |
Diary, Accessing Records From The Grid: It is possible to open records by clicking in specific fields from the diary screen’s day view – pointing and double mouse clicking will display the following:
Area |
Form Displayed |
|
The diary screen allows you to record when a vehicle has been delivered back to the client. Point and mouse click in the Col (collected) column a green tick is displayed. Note: It is only possible to tick closed job records. |
Client Name |
Client Form |
||
Vehicle Registration |
Vehicle Form |
||
Make & Model |
Vehicle Form |
||
Job # |
Job Card |
||
Booking Line |
Booking Form |
When forms are accessed via the diary grid they can be edited in the same way as if they were opened from the client or vehicle listing. To display changes made to these records you will need to refresh the diary screen (change screens and then re-open the diary screen). To display services simply point at the service field
Jobs & Bookings, Week View: In this mode the operator can view 7 days of jobs and bookings plus open invoices are displayed in the eighth grid.
Fig 4.02 Jobs & Bookings Week View
|
Invoice Grid Week View: The eighth grid displays open invoices and cash sales information includes client, job number and the opening date. Once an invoice or cash sale is closed it will automatically be removed from the open invoice display.
|
Fig 4.03 Open Invoice Grid
View an invoice: Point at the required record and left hand mouse click.
Deleting Bookings: It is possible to delete bookings from the diary screen in day view only: highlight the record and select the delete button. Note: You can only delete bookings it is not possible to delete work in progress or closed jobs from the diary screen.
Booking Sheets, Printing: It is possible to print single or multiple booking sheets, information includes client, vehicle details, service history, vehicle availability plus work authorisation. Booking sheets are printed from the sales screen. Create the booking in the normal way, select the sales icon from the top of the screen, use the drop down menu at the top of form to select booking. Click in the check box to select records you wish to print booking sheets for. To initiate the print run select print from the bottom of the sales screen.
Fig 4.04 Selecting Bookings From The Sales Screen
To print the job / booking status for the
day select the print function located at the top of the diary display.
Bookings, Creating: Bookings can be created from three areas:
Diary Screen
Client Listing
Vehicle Listing
To create a booking select this button from either
of the above
Selection will open the booking form, which contains information on the client, vehicle, services required and the period of availability. It is also possible to allocate technicians to a job from the booking form. To create bookings follow these steps:
1) Select create a booking either by client or vehicle.
2) If the client does not exist open a client form by selecting new and enter the details.
3) Select the vehicle or enter details if the client is new or if you are creating a booking for an additional vehicle
4) Select the service or services required
5) Update the odometer if necessary – vehicles with a service history
6) Select the start and finish times
7) Enter all other details as required ie: order number, WOF or registration check
8) Work to be done if applicable
9) Technicians time allocation
10) OK (F12) to save the booking on the diary
Selecting The Client: Type the customer or company name into the client field, click on the client field button you will now see the client is highlighted in the client listing. If the client does not exist click on insert new and add the details, remember you must click on OK to save any new information.
Selecting The Vehicle: Select the vehicle from the list. If no vehicles exist or you wish to add a new vehicle select insert – New and enter vehicle details as previously described. Select the vehicle you wish to work on by moving the cursor with the arrow keys or clicking. Select OK (F12) – You are now prompted to select a service from the listing.
|
||||
Fig 4.06 Vehicle Availability – Finish Time |
Vehicle Availability: The diary represents in graphical form time the vehicle is actually available. The time line is blue when entered as a booking, changing to light red once a job card has been created indicating work is in progress within the original allocated time block. If this time is exceeded the time bar will change every 15 minutes displaying in bright red indicating the nominated time has been exceeded. To use this function select start using the pick list select a start date and time, repeat the process to record a finish date and time.
Allocating Technicians Time: Select Tech Time option enter the technician’s name, if you wish to set up a new technician select the field button to view the list. Select Insert – New and complete the fields select OK to save. Allocate time using the same method as vehicle availability; the chosen time is represented by a blue line in the Technician Time Allocation field at the bottom of the diary screen.
|
Order Number: Enter orders number if required, this will be printed on the invoice and statement.
Key Tag: This is a free typing reference field that can be used to record the key tag number issued to a vehicle, duplicate entries are not allowed on open jobs.
Warrant Registration Due: Select the month by clicking on the selection button to the right of the month field, next select the year using the same process.
Odometer: Update the odometer reading (not necessary if this is a new vehicle)
Work Done: This field allows you to make notes on work that is required; any text entered here will be inserted into the work done section of the job card when it is created. Note: that you can also access the work done comments pick list and insert line items.
Work Done, Text Selection: This Auto Easy feature allows the operator to store commonly used work description for retrieval by code. The function will dramatically reduce the amount of time it takes to enter text into this area. A list of all work descriptions can be printed from the reports module by selecting work done list from the other reports section.
Work Done, Spell Checker: Auto Easy has an in-built spell check function for the work text field. To check and correct spelling first type into the text field, next select the ABC button located on the bottom right of each field.
If there is a spelling mistake a window is displayed listing suggested replacements
|
To replace a word highlight the selection from the suggestions list and click on change, to ignore a single entry click on ignore to ignore all entries of that word select ignore all. Select change all if you wish to replace all entries of the incorrectly spelt word in the text block. You can also add new words to the dictionary by selecting add. Selecting the suggest button will display the most probable replacement, to enter select change. |
On completion of the spell check the check spelling display will automatically close.
Bookings, Entering Work Descriptions – Select work to be done from the booking form the list is now displayed, select new from the bottom of the data window. A work done details form allows you to enter a code and the required lines of text. Codes can be alpha or numeric or a combination of both. To save the new text, select OK (F12).
Work descriptions can also be added from the diary screen by selecting the pick lists from the top menu bar of the diary screen point and click on work descriptions this will open the text field. Alternatively pressing F12 from the diary screen will take the operator directly to the work description listing.
Bookings, Selecting work descriptions: type the text or arrow to the required entry, your cursor will now highlight the text line to paste this onto the booking form press enter or mouse click on the line a tick will appear in the box to the right.
Multiple entries can be made from this screen. If a mistake is made and you wish to un-flag an entry, point at the line and mouse click or arrow up / down to place your cursor on the line and press enter. The tick is now no longer displayed indicting the line will not be pasted to the booking form and ultimately to the job card.
Bookings, Comments: It is possible to record special instructions in the comments section of the booking form. Point and click on the comments tab, type your notes into the comments field. Jobs with notes are identified in the diary screen with a note it icon. Pointing and double clicking on the icon opens the comments field.
Bookings, Saving: Check all information is correct then select OK (F12) from the booking form. A blue bar in the Jobs and bookings section now represents the booking with any time allocated to a technician showing in the bottom section also in blue.
Bookings, Viewing: Double click on the line item or press enter all information entered is now visible.
Bookings, Editing: Open the booking by pointing at the entry on the diary screen, select the field you wish to edit and save. If the odometer has been entered incorrectly editing the value from the booking form will change the entry on the job card header.
Bookings, Printing: It is possible to print a booking form by selecting the print option at the bottom of the form. Booking forms can be printed from a booking or an open job.
Fig 4.09 Bookings Are Represented By A Blue Line On The Diary Screen
Bookings, Viewing Client & Vehicle Details: You can view and edit client and vehicle details from the booking form by selecting the client or vehicle buttons on the right hand side of the form. To view a transaction histories select Client and click on the history tab.
Booking Sheets, Printing: It is possible to print single or multiple booking sheets, information includes client, vehicle details, service history, vehicle availability plus work authorisation. Booking sheets are printed from the sales screen. Create the booking in the normal way, select the sales icon from the top of the screen, use the drop down menu at the top of form to select booking. Click in the check box to select records you wish to print booking sheets for. To initiate the print run select print from the bottom of the sales screen.
Bookings, Step Through Process: It is possible to select a step through process to manage bookings. To activate this function you will need to access File / Settings / Program Options and select the step by step booking process option
Save your setting by selecting OK (F12). The step through process is now activated when selecting the booking option from the diary screen.
Sort Options: From the diary screen, jobs can be sorted by client name, vehicle registration or job number, to sort by either of these fields point and double click on the column header record.
Short Cut Keys: Use C to select clients or V when creating a booking via the registration number.
Diagnostic Worksheet: The diagnostic worksheet is formatted so the service adviser can record specific problems a client maybe experiencing, the report can then be printed and attached to the job card for the technicians reference.
Diagnostic Worksheet, Accessing & Printing: The diagnostic worksheet form can be accessed from the option displayed under the work to be done section of the booking form.
Fig 4.10 Accessing The Diagnostic Worksheet |
Fig 4.11 Completing The Diagnostic Sheet |
To print the diagnostic worksheets select the print button at the bottom of the display.
Technicians Labour Allocations
Labour Allocation, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate allows the operator to allocate labour resources to specific jobs. The allocations are displayed on the technician’s diary screen by day only. The technician’s time allocations are color coded and displayed in the time grid
Labour Allocation, Viewing: To display the technicians allocation screen point and click on the icon to the right of the job view at the top of the diary screen.
Select the centre icon to open
the technician’s allocation screen
The screen displays the client’s name, registration make and model, labour allocated colour coded (by technician) in 15-minute time cells including job status. The grid at the bottom of the screen displays the colour allocated to each technician, total hours available for the day, allocated and remaining hours. The display also shows total hours allocated by job and technician. The screen displays job status plus a list of all jobs to be done can be viewed by hovering the pointer over the job number.
Fig 4.12 Technicians Labour Allocations
Labour Allocation, Available Hours: Available hours per day need to be recorded in the employee form. To enter this value, select lists / employees, point and double click on the record you wish to edit and enter the daily hours available in the daily hour’s field, save your changes with OK (F12). This value will now display on the technician’s allocation screen.
It is possible to change the daily hour available default value from the labour allocation screen, point and double click on the technician at the bottom of the display an available hours message box is displayed showing the default value.
|
To change the available hours for a technician highlight the value and overtype. The total hours available for technicians will adjust + / - depending on the entry |
Labour Allocation, Adding: To allocate a technician to a job, point at the name field (each technician has a unique colour displayed in this field) and left hand mouse click, the grid will highlight. Move your mouse pointer to the time cells you wish to allocate, hold down the left hand mouse button and drag across the line. When the appropriate time cells are completed release the mouse button. The time cells will now display the colour of the technician you allocated. To delete allocations, repeat the same process holding down the right hand mouse button instead of the left, this action will clear the time cells.
To print the job / technician status for
the day select the print function located at the top of the allocation
display, select all or the individual technicians you wish to send to
the report.
.
Jobs Carried Forward: This version allows the operator to set-up a prompt reminder to edit the allocated hours for the day when a job that is carried over from a previous day is opened for the first time. If you wish to use this feature go to settings and select this option from database setting:
When set to true a message
will be displayed on opening a carried forward job for the first time.
Message is displayed the first
time a job is opened.
Loan Car, Recording: Auto Easy allows you to record loan car bookings directly onto the diary screen, to use this function you will first need to record details of the loan cars. Select Lists / Loan Cars from the top of the screen. Select New from the bottom of the list – add the vehicle details, selecting the make and model from the drop down list.
|
Save the loan car details by selecting OK (F12). To allocate a loan car to a client select the loan car option located at the top of the diary grid.
|
Fig 4.13 Recording The Loan Car Details
Fig 4.14 Allocating A Loan Car To A Client |
To save the details select OK (F12). The loan car allocation is represented on the diary screen by a light pink line extending across the time cells selected. It is also possible to record that the loan car has been returned by double clicking on the time line and selecting the returned option on the loan car form. A green tick is displayed in the Col. Column.
Deleting - To delete a loan car allocation from the diary screen, simply highlight the entry you wish to delete and select delete from your keyboard.
|
Loan Car, Contract Printing: To print the loan contract for your client click on the contract option from the loan car form, it is suggested you print 2 copies one for the client and retain the other for your records.
Loan Car, Contract Editing: you to edit the terms and conditions of the loan contract, to access the standard text open the settings option from the file menu, click on the fifth tab titled loan car, edit text as required and save by selecting OK(F12).
Loan Car Movements Report: On the return of a loan car you will be prompted to record the kilometers on the vehicle. A loan car report can be accessed from Reports / Other Reports; the format details loan car movements over a selected date range.
Notes, Loan Car Bookings – Point and click in the note field from the diary screen to add a note to a loan car allocation, click OK from the loan comments screen and a note it icon will be displayed in the note column. To view or modify a note point and click on the icon, to save any changes select the OK (F12) option from the bottom of the text entry screen
Diary, Day Note
The operator has the ability to record a day note on the diary screen; an added function of this feature is the ability to block bookings for a selected day. To make a day note select the note option from the display above the main diary grid, type your note into the text field, if you wish to block bookings for the day select the option at the bottom of the form. To enter a note for another day, select the day from the diary options first, if you try to enter bookings for a blocked day a message is displayed informing you that you cannot proceed.
|
Select this option to enter a day note or block bookings
|
Fig 4.15 Entering A Day Note
Overview: This function allows the operator to track the actual time worked by each technician on individual jobs. The technician can log on from both the labour allocation screen or directly from the job card, Auto Easy provides the user with a barcode option, requiring the technician to scan a unique printed barcode from the technicians list and job card. The clocked time is displayed in the labour allocation table on job close when time tracking is used.
Time Tracking, Logging On And Off: An employee record must be created for a technician to log on / off of jobs, If a barcodes are the preferred method of identifying a technician you must print these from the report provided – Select reports / Other Reports / Technician Barcodes
|
A unique barcode will be printed for each employee, it is suggested that you cut out and laminate the code. |
|
To log onto a job select either the F11 key or click on activities, point and click on the clock on / off job function from the menu list. It is possible to log a technician on and off a job from anywhere within the program. Simply press the F11 key or Activities / Clock on / off function. Using this function from forms other than the job card will require you to enter the job number via the keyboard or scanning the job barcode.
|
The select or scan technician form allows technicians to log on / off of selected jobs, two fields are displayed, job number and technician. If you are using barcodes point at the barcode on the bottom of the job card and scan, the job number is recorded, next scan the technician’s bar code a message is displayed showing the date and time the technician logged on or off a job complete the process by clicking OK. If you are not using a scanner type the job number into the Job # field, tab to the technician selection and click on the button to the right, the technicians list is now in view, highlight the technician you wish to log on / off and select OK (F12).
|
|
When clocking On / Off of jobs a message is displayed informing the user who has clocked onto or off of a job and at what time. If you are using a barcode scanner, scan the code and select enter, there is no need to open the technicians list.
Note: It is not possible for a technician to be logged onto two jobs, if you try to log a technician onto a job twice a prompt will request that you log off from the original job.
Time Tracking / Viewing & Editing: To view, edit or delete time tracking, select F11 or Activities / Log on / off job function. Enter the job number point and click on view, the clock times are displayed, if you wish to delete an entry highlight the line and select the delete function from the bottom of the screen. To edit an entry point and double click on the line or highlight the record and select edit (F2) from the bottom menu bar.
Fig 4.13 Clocked Times List For An Individual Job
|
Click on the button to the right of the fields to change the data displayed. It is also possible to allocate labour to alternate technicians by selecting the button to the right of the Technician field, highlighting the replacement technician and selecting OK (F12) from the bottom of the technicians list. To save changes made to the clock on / off details select OK (F12) on close.
|
Clocked Time View: Auto Easy also displays clocked labour allocations by technician, to access this function select the time clock icon from the top left hand corner of the diary screen
Select the third icon to
the right to display the clocked time screen
Fig 4.16 Clocked Time View Display
The top grid provides the user with a graphical and statistical representation of clocked time allocated to each technician for the day. Each job has a unique colour code, the job numbers and allocated total time is displayed in the lower grid. If a technician has clocked on / off multiple jobs during the day each job is represented by a colour coded bar to the right of his name in the time column.
Clocked Time View, Accessing Job Details: To view job details point and double click on the job number displayed in the lower grid, this action opens the booking form, from this display it is possible to view the job by selecting the job card button located on the bottom left hand side of the display.
Fig 4.17 Opening The Booking Form From Clocked Time View
Clocked
Log On, Viewing: It is possible
to view the last log on time and job number by technician from the labour
allocation screen. To display this data select the icon
from the top of the diary screen. Details of the last log on (the job
a technician is currently assigned to) is recorded at the bottom of the
labour allocation screen.
Non-Chargeable Items, Creating: To create a new non-chargeable item select lists / non chargeable items. To create a new item select new from the bottom of the display, enter the name of the item and save using OK (F12).
Fig 4.18 Non-Chargeable Items List
Non-Chargeable Time, Allocating: Auto Easy allows the operator to track the amount of time technicians are allocated to non-chargeable tasks. The allocation is summarised separately from chargeable allocations in a technician’s productivity report.
To allocate a technician to a non-chargeable task select the F11 key from any screen, manually enter or scan the barcode for the unique non-chargeable item. Barcodes are printed at the bottom of the technician’s barcode report.
|
To allocate a technician to a non-chargeable task select the N/C option, click on the button to the right of the N/C field select the task, next select the technician you wish to allocate. A prompt will display the status of the selection.. |
Non-chargeable time is represented by a grey time bar on the clocked time view screen; the total amount of hours for the day allocated to non-chargeable activities is displayed under the NC job type grid
Productivity Reporting: The productivity report displays all clocked labour allocations by technician / job for a selected day. Chargeable and non chargeable times are totalised by each and all technicians. To access this report select reports / technician time reports / productivity report – enter the date / dates you wish to view and proceed by selecting OK (F12).
|
|
Note: The productivity report can be run for any date range or period |
Technicians allocations by job Allocation summary
Labour Allocation Table: The labour allocation table is displayed at the top of the diary screen; values can be calculated in two ways.
1) Total technician hours available minus the allocated total value from the technicians allocation screen.
2) Total technicians time available minus the total estimated time for all jobs on the viewed day.
Automaton defaults to calculate via the labour allocation screen, if you wish to change the calculation to the second option select File / Settings / Database Settings, click in the checkbox of the following option:
Save your selection by exiting setting with OK (F12).
The table displayed at
the top of the diary screen records available / allocated and hours remaining
according to the selection.
Technician hours available: Auto Easy allows you to record days or periods when a technician is not available. If for instance an apprentice attends classes on a Monday you can record from the employee form that he is not available on that day of the week. When this option is selected the employees daily hours will not be added to the available total for that day.
Availability is calculated by the total daily hours and days the technician is available. To select a period ie: holidays point and click on the box to the right of the unavailable fields, select the dates from the calendar. Daily hours will not be added to the total hours available in the period displayed. |
|
Overview: Auto Easy allows you to manage the sales process effectively by providing an option for each transaction type. For instance you can perform a simple cash sale or create a booking and job card to retain details of both customer and vehicle or create a charge invoice requiring only the client details to be recorded. All invoice forms and job cards share the same operating features making it easy to familiarise yourself with the all-important sales functions of Auto Easy.
Invoicing, Setup: Setup options for the invoice layout are accessed from File / Printer settings. Options include the ability to use letterhead stationery, adjust the top printer margin, invoice type, copies to be printed and selection of a logo. See page 15 – Installing Auto Easy Ultimate
There are other options that will affect the invoice layout these include:
Track Loyalty Points: If you are operating a loyalty program mouse click in the appropriate field. When using the loyalty program member’s invoices display a statement of points to date.
Track RSA: This feature allows you to issue roadside assistance to your clients if you intend using support services.
RSA Contact Number: If you are issuing roadside assistance to your client base type in the contact number, which will be printed on the invoice. If you are using support services the number will be supplied to you. RSA issue details are printed on the invoice if this feature is selected.
See page 15 – Installing Auto Easy For Further Details
Job Card, Overview: The job card allows the operator to enter parts from either the catalogue (no stock control), inventory listing or as a buy in (parts bought specifically for a job). Auto Easy also allows the addition of extra services and the ability to create purchase orders for suppliers. A financial summary is displayed showing a breakdown of parts and, GST is also recorded in this area. Text relating to work done and vehicle faults are entered directly onto the job card. To save entries without exiting the job card select the save option from the bottom of the form.
Job Card, Creating: - A job card can be created once the booking is completed in two ways.
1) Directly from the booking screen before it is committed to the diary.
2) Selecting the booking (Blue Bar) from the Diary screen.
From the booking form click on create new job card, a prompt will appear displaying previous vehicle faults (If faults have been reported prior to this job card being created).
Fig 5.1 Job Card Layout
Job Card, Previous Vehicle Faults: If the vehicle has been worked on previously and vehicle faults were reported an option to paste the faults list to the new job card is in view. Selecting the copy command will place this text into the vehicle faults section of the new job card. It is suggested these are always copied to the new job to ensure consistency in reporting, if some items are found to have been attended to the operator can edit the text in the vehicle faults section of the job card. The new list of faults will then overwrite the previous record to be displayed when the next job card is created. Selecting yes or no will now create a new job card. Remember to save the new job card you must exit only using the OK (F12). Once a job card is created the booking time line will turn light red on the diary screen to indicate work in progress.
Job Card, Layout: The job card is split into areas each of which has a specific function these are:
Client Details: Includes address and contact numbers
Parts & Labour: This window displays all services and parts attached to this job including the retail price. The FP column indicates the fixed price status of both services and parts.
Summary: Displays job card totalisation for parts and labour plus the tax component
Vehicle Details: Information includes registration, make & model, RSA details, odometer and the next service due.
Vehicle Report: Allows you to add faults and other text by free typing or selecting from the faults database.
Work Done: Records all work performed, any text entered during the booking process will be displayed in this area
Other Fields
Salesperson: Enter the name of the salesperson if required
Order Number: Displays order number entered on the booking form – number can also be entered once the job card is open
Email: Allows you to email the form directly to a client
Job Card, Adding A Service: To add an additional service to the job card select add service. The service listing is now displayed select a service by moving the cursor with the arrow keys or pointing and clicking on the service description. This process will flag the service by placing a tick in the box to the right of the list; multiple services can also be flagged for importing to the job card. Selecting OK (F12) will paste your selections to the job card.
Job Card, Hide Hours On Invoice: Auto Easy defaults all non-fixed price services to not show hours on the invoice. Ie: 2 hours of labour sold at $60.00 per hour will print as labour = $120.00. You can however show labour by the hour 2 hours x $60.00 = $120.00. To show hours on the invoice point at the non-fixed price service and double click. The service form is now in view, point at the hide hours on the invoice check box and click. The hours charged will now print on the invoice.
Deselect this option from the
service form if you wish to display hours charged.
Loyalty, Redeeming Loyalty Points – If the operator is using the loyalty Programme feature it is possible to redeem points to pay for a service. Firstly select the service form enter the amount of points required to cover the cost of the service. Selecting the use loyalty point’s option from the service form will check the client’s loyalty point balance and deduct the redemption value from the total.
Selecting this option from the
service form will allow you to redeem loyalty points.
Note: If the reward account does not contain enough points to cover the cost of the service a warning will be displayed and the transaction will not be allowed.
Job Card, Adding Parts: Highlight the service you are adding the parts to, this ensures the items are listed under that service on the invoice; parts are also allocated correctly for reporting purposes. Select the add part button to enter parts from either the catalogue listing or inventory file, to select an item type the part number into the search field and select by either pointing and clicking or pressing the enter key. Multiple selections are available from this screen, when all selections are made click on OK (F12). The items are entered into the parts and labour section of the job card, point at the quantity and financial fields click to edit, you can navigate using your arrow keys. Note: If an inventory item is out of stock the word inventory is displayed in red.
Fig 5.2 Editing Quantity & Retail Price From The Job Card Fig 5.3 Selecting Tax
Job Card, Selecting Tax Codes: To change the default tax code point at the tax field of the line item you wish to edit and click, select a new tax code from the drop down list. If you wish to add a new tax code to the list, select lists / tax codes from the top of the screen and add to the list by selecting new from the bottom of the display.
Job Card, Fixed Price Services: When a fixed price service is added to a job card or invoice the FP column is ticked, all parts added to that service will automatically be flagged as being included in the fixed price service. If you wish to charge for an item (not included in the fixed price), point and click on the FP field, the financial summary will change to reflect the extra charge.
Job Card, Buy in: Allows you to enter goods received by supplier or create purchase orders for parts specific to the open job card. See purchasing for more details.
Job Card, Viewing Or Editing Parts And Service Entries: arts and services can be edited only when the job card is open, viewing data can be performed from both open and closed job cards. To edit entries move your cursor to the part or service and point and click on the required line or select view / edit from the parts and labour data window.
Job Card, Removing Parts Or Services: Select the item you wish to remove by highlighting with your cursor, click on the remove function confirm the action. If a service is removed all associated parts will also be deleted from the job card.
Job Card, Moving Parts & Services: The parts & labour section of the job card allows the operator to change the order of parts and services by dragging and dropping items within the grid. To perform this ask highlight the item you wish to move, hold down the left hand mouse button and drag the item to the position you wish it to occupy.
It is also possible to move compete service (parts & labour) , Auto Easy allows you to move parts from one service to another on open jobs, however once a job is closed parts can only be moved within the service. You will have to reopen the job if you wish to move items between services.
Job Card, Copying & Pasting Contents: Auto Easy allows you to copy the contents of a job card to another open job. To perform this task use the copy and paste buttons located under the parts and labour section of the job card.
Selecting the icon to the left
will copy services, parts and text to the clipboard, use the icon to the
right to paste the clipboards content to another job card.
When pasting from one job card to another you need to be aware of the following:
1) You will replace the total contents of the job card you are pasting to with the copied data, you can’t append the target job card.
|
2) If buy-ins form part of the paste you will be prompted to create an order selecting no will paste all items except buy-ins, on selecting yes your supplier list is displayed so you can choose the original or alternative supplier. Items are displayed on the job card as being on order. The supplier order can be converted to a bill once the items are delivered. |
Services & parts can be copied from open and closed job cards; however they can only be pasted to an open job.
Job Card, Inserting Text To Parts & Labour: You have the option to insert text into the parts and labour section of the job card on selection or automatically. The text is printed on the invoice under the part or service the text is attached to. The job text form provides the same text and link capabilities as the work done field, you can free type or insert text from your work done database by selecting the option from the bottom of the form. Spell checker is also available by selecting the abc option.
Job Card, Auto Insert To Job Text: Work done attached to services can be pasted automatically into the job text field instead of using the work done field. For this feature to work it is essential that you have text attached to the service and have selected that service text goes to service comments on job card from Settings / Database Settings.
Note:
Select this option from Settings / Database Settings
to auto insert service text to the job text field.
Access job text by performing the following:
Point and mouse click on the column located in the parts and labour grid to the left of the type field identified by … a text box will display. The field has a limitation of 64,000 characters and can be populated manually or automatically from attached service text. |
||
|
When text has been added to the job item text field a note it icon is displayed in the column. To view text point and click on the note it icon. |
|
|
|
|
|
Comments are printed on the final invoice under the item you attached the text to.
|
It is suggested that before accessing this feature you decide on how you wish your invoice to present. For instance you may decide that some services require the work description to be in the standard work done field, occasionally you may wish to print text under the service or part. In this situation it would be best to not select the auto entry option from settings and make manual entries according to the layout required. |
Note: Text can be added to open or closed jobs using this feature.
Text Editing: Auto Easy allows you to display and print text entered into the work done, job text or vehicle report fields in bold, italics or red. It you wish to change the text format point in front of the first character you wish to change, hold down the left mouse button and drag along the line until the blue shade finishes after the last character, release the mouse button. Next select the RIGHT HAND mouse button you will see a menu is displayed, select the format required and double left mouse click, the text format will change.
|
It is possible to using this feature to store multiple edits however these will have to be performed one at a time. To undo a format highlight the line of text right hand mouse click and click on the format you wish to change. |
Job Card, Applying A Discount: Allows the operator to allocate a discount to the job card. Discounts can only be added to open job cards, if you wish to apply a discount to a job card or invoice that is closed, reopen, apply the discount and close, the financial summary and the totals are adjusted accordingly.
Job Card, Spell Checker: Auto Easy has an in-built spell check function for both the work done and vehicle report fields. To check and correct spelling first type into the text field, next select the ABC button located on the bottom right of each field.
If there is a spelling mistake a window is displayed listing suggested replacements
|
To replace a word highlight the selection from the suggestions list and click on change, to ignore a single entry click on ignore to ignore all entries of that word select ignore all. Select change all if you wish to replace all entries of the incorrectly spelt word in the text block. You can also add new words to the dictionary by selecting add. Selecting the suggest button will display the most probable replacement, to enter select change. |
On completion of the spell check the check spelling display will automatically close. If you wish to cancel the spell check select the cancel option from the bottom right hand of the screen.
Note: The spell checker will only work for the work done and vehicle report fields.
Labour,
Applying To Open Jobs: to allocate labour to single or multiple
technicians from an open job card select the labour button located under
the parts & labour section of the job card. To use this function you
will first need to setup your technicians in the employee list by selecting
Lists / Employees. If you wish to allocate the total hours to one technician
select with the mouse and click on allocate remainder. All the labour
has now been allocated to the technician selected. To enter multiple labour
allocations select a technician and type in the hours or dollar value,
select allocate. Repeat this procedure for any subsequent technicians
using allocate remainder on the final entry. The labour allocation form
allows you to record actual time worked, making it possible to track the
true productivity of technicians. When the task is completed save with
OK (F12). The allocated hours (charged & actual) will be recorded
in the technician’s reports; if you do not wish these statistics to form
part of your reporting do not apply labour to open job cards.
Job
Card, Financial Report:
The report option displays financial details of the current job both by
service and part including percentages, sub totals and grand totals. It
is possible to include the cost of labour, which is based on the wages
paid to technicians over the last 90 days divided by the standard rate
to display an hourly cost or the value entered onto the employee form
in the cost per hour field. Entering a password and ticking the appropriate
field in the control variables can suppress the display of this information.
Fig 5.4 Viewing The Financial Report From The Job Card Or Invoice
Job Card, Viewing Service History: Select history from the bottom of the form to view past job cards by selecting the arrow to the left of the button, selecting the right hand arrow will move the operator forward.
Vehicle Faults, Adding Text: This function can be performed in two ways
From the job card by selecting Add vehicle faults
Selecting Lists / Vehicle Faults
Vehicle Faults, Entering Records: Select vehicle faults from either the job card or diary the list is now displayed, select new from the bottom of the data window. A vehicle faults details form allows you to enter a code and the required lines of text. Codes can be alpha or numeric or a combination of both. To save the new text lines, select OK (F12).
Job Card, Selecting Vehicle Faults: type the code or arrow to the required entry, your cursor will now highlight the text line to paste this onto the job card press enter or mouse click on the line a tick will appear in the box to the right. Multiple entries can be made from this screen. If a mistake is made and you wish to un-flag an entry, point at the line and mouse click or arrow up / down to place your cursor on the line and press enter. The tick is now no longer displayed indicting the line will not be pasted to the booking form and ultimately to the job card.
Vehicle Faults, Editing Entries: Select the list and move your cursor to the entry requiring editing, select edit from the bottom of the form, make the changes and save by selecting OK (F12).
Fig 5.5 Selecting Vehicle Faults Fig 5.6 Adding Vehicle Faults
Job Card, Selecting Client Details: Selecting the client button from the bottom of the job card displays client contact details, profile and history.
Job Card, Selecting Vehicle Details: Displays vehicle details including last service, next service warrant of fitness / registration renewals and RSA information.
Printing, Job Card: Selecting job card will display a job card including all information entered when the booking was first created and any subsequent information added to the job card after it was created. To print select the print icon located at the top of the display.
Printing, Job Summary: Allows you to view and print the invoice as a job summary prior to closing the job card, the format is exactly the same as an invoice except the word invoice is replaced by job summary. If you are unsure or wish to check the invoice details from hard copy print a job summary before you close the job as no changes can be made once the job has been closed.
Job Card, Creating A Purchase Order: If inventory items have been added to the job card where insufficient stock is available the word inventory will be highlighted in red. It is possible to raise a purchase order directly from the job card for these items by selecting the Order option located on the bottom menu bar of the job card. On selection you will be need to select the supplier you wish to provide the items, highlight your selection, select OK (F12), a purchase order assigned to the supplier listing the items required is displayed. Save the purchase order by selecting OK. When the items arrive convert the purchase order into a bill, enter the supplier invoice number and save by selecting OK (F12). The items originally highlighted in red will now be displayed in normal text indicating the parts are on hand and the job can be completed.
Access job notes made n the diary screen directly from the job card.
Job Card, Closing: To close a job card select close, the functions that follow depend on the setting in your control variables. You will notice there is a selection in this management function labeled auto procedure on job close if this is set to true the following will occur:
Job Card, Labour allocation: The labour allocation screen allows you to allocate labour to single or multiple technicians. To use this function you will first need to setup your technicians in the employee list by selecting Lists / Employees. If you wish to allocate the total hours to one technician select with the mouse and click on allocate remainder. All the labour has now been allocated to the technician selected. To enter multiple labour allocations select a technician and type in the hours or dollar value, select allocate. Repeat this procedure for any subsequent technicians using allocate remainder on the final entry. The labour allocation form allows you to record actual time worked, making it possible to track the true productivity of technicians, payroll also allows you to calculate wages based on hours charged or hours worked. When the task is completed save with OK (F12).
Job Card, Service Reminders – From this screen service reminder records can be added or removed from the vehicle record, or current entries can be edited. If auto close is set to false in the control variables, on closing the job card only the job update screen will be in view although labour and service reminders can still be edited / added or removed.
Fig 5.7 Allocating Labour Fig 5.8 Adding Service Reminders
Service Reminders, Managing From The Job Card: The service reminder form is split into two sections existing service reminders and new service reminders. It is possible to perform the following:
Clearing Existing Reminders: Select clear from under the existing service reminder window
Adding New Service Reminders: Select add, from the service listing highlight the next service you wish to reminder the customer to have performed, complete the kilometre and month fields.
Fig 5.8 Distances / Time Form |
Changing Service Reminders: Select the change option from the Service Reminders form. Edit the Kms. And months field on the distance / time form. Select OK (F12) to save.
Removing Service Reminders: Selecting the remove option will delete any highlighted service reminders.
|
|
Fig 5.9 Editing The Odometer From The Job Card
|
Odometer Editing: It is possible to edit the odometer from both an open and closed job card. To perform this function point and double click on the odometer field located in the header of the job card. Change the reading in the box provided, save by selecting OK.
| |
|
|
|
Job Card, Odometer Reading Prompt: Auto Easy will prompt you to enter an odometer reading as you close a job if one of the following has occurred:
1) The odometer reading is the same on this job as the previous closed job performed
2) If the odometer reading field is blank or contains a zero reading.
In either of these situations you will be prompted with the following message
|
Select yes if you wish to proceed, the vehicle form will open with the cursor flashing in the odometer reading field, enter a value and close the vehicle record with OK (F12). Finalise the close job function. |
Bill To Fleet Solutions: This option is only available to authorised sites – tick the box if you wish to allocate this sale to Fleet Solutions. Note: The client will have to be set up as a sub client of Fleet Solutions for you to receipt multiple payments.
Printing, Invoices From Closed Job Cards: Select Ok (F12) from the job update report, to print the attachments (checklists) tick the print attachments on invoice selection. It is also possible to print a closed invoice from the body of a closed invoice by selecting the print option and clicking on invoice.
Emailing From The Job Card Close: As you close the job card you are presented with the option to print or email the form. If you wish to email the invoice point and click in the email option checkbox, select OK, Auto Easy will confirm sending of the document. Note: This feature will only function when an email address is recorded on the client card.
Labour,
Viewing From A Job Card:
You may want to view details of the job labour allocation after it has
been closed. Go to a closed job card; select the labour button to view
the labour allocation screen. It is possible to edit the labour changes
from this screen even though the job card is closed.
Charge To: This option allows you to charge an alternative client for the job. Point and click on the button to the right of the charge field, your customer list is displayed, highlight the client you wish to bill, select OK (F12) from the bottom of the client list, your selection is displayed in the field. Click OK (F12) to finalise the transaction.
An entry is posted to both the original client and the billed clients service history, no value is posted to the original client.
Billed client’s history
Original client’s history
The transaction will be printed on the charged client’s statement
Picture Attachments – Pictures can now be stored against a specified job, to use this feature open the job card and select the view pictures icon displayed under the parts and labour section.
|
Selecting this option will open the images window, the job number is inserted in the certificate number / folder name field, this can be overwritten however the folder must always be a sub-folder of Auto Easy Ultimate\Site. |
To create the folder select the set option accept the create prompt, the process will be confirmed.
|
Select the OK option to save the new folder. All images relating to this job must now be saved to the designated folder. Once the images are stored they can be retrieved from the job card by selecting the view pictures option. Pointing and clicking on the image will expand the picture for more detailed viewing. To close the viewing screen select OK (F12). |
Notes- The viewing window also contains a free typing notes section, to enter text simply type in the field provided and save using OK (F12).
Fig 5.10a Image Viewing Window
Job Card, Viewing: Open and closed job cards can be accessed in three ways:
1) Diary screen by double clicking on the green time line and selecting job card
2) Client transaction history – Select clients or vehicles highlight the client or vehicle and select history from the client form a list of all previous transactions is displayed. Point and click on the required line item to open the job card.
3) Sales Screen – Highlight the job you wish to view and double click n the transaction
Job Card, Deleting – This function can only be performed on closed job cards, select clients from the top of the screen, highlight the client with the job card you wish to delete. Double click on the record or select edit to view the client form, select the history tab and perform the following:
1) Highlight the job you wish to delete
2) Select the delete function from the bottom of the screen
3) Type in the password, enter the operators name and reason for the deletion
4) Select OK (F12) to complete the process.
5) If a payment has been made against the job, you will be requested to enter which account you wish to withdraw the payment from, alternatively you can choose not to make an adjustment; in this case the amount will remain on the clients account as an unallocated credit.
All parts and labour allocations relating to the transaction are now reversed, this procedure will only work on closed job cards; open cards cannot be deleted.
Job Card, Reopening: Auto Easy allows you to open a closed job card, to perform this function go to a closed job card either from the diary screen or client card. Select the re-open option. Enter the password (entered in settings / Security). Next you need to enter your name and the reason for the job card to be reopened. When these details have been entered financial records can be edited.
Note: Text can be edited from either an open or closed job card; changes will be printed on the invoice.
Invoicing
Invoicing, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to create three types of invoice a vehicle invoice is not recorded in the day segment of the diary screen. A charge invoice allows you to allocate an invoice to a client account without the client having a vehicle attached. Finally a cash sale gives you the ability to create an invoice without allocating to a customer. All of the invoice functions operate in the same way as a job card.
Invoicing, Accessing: To create a new invoice select the invoice icon from the top of screen, a menu displaying the three invoice types is in view. Select the invoice required by pointing and clicking on your selection.
The cash invoice has the same functionality as a normal job card except the service type headings are not printed on the invoice. Also you are able to exit and return to the card, the open transaction is recorded in the invoice grid of the diary and as a line item in the sales screen. When a cash sale is closed the record is deleted from the dairy screen.
Invoice Layout: Cash sale is the parts and labour default on this form, the cash sale display is not printed on the invoice. It is possible to allocate parts to the cash sale item; only the items selected will be printed on the final invoice.
Notes: This section is used to make notations on the invoice. It is possible to select text lines from the vehicle faults function.
Work Performed: If labour is included on the invoice use this text field to note the work performed. . It is possible to select text lines from the add work done function
Service Selection: It is possible to select services from the cash invoice; you can allocate parts to a service the same as a job card. Note: The invoice will not display the fixed price or mechanical repair headings that are printed on a standard invoice
Cash Sale, Viewing A Closed Invoice: Closed cash sale invoices can be accessed by opening the sales screen, highlighting cash sales from the drop down menu. To view cash sale details point and double click on the line item.
Fig 5.12 Viewing Cash Sales
Charge Invoice, Creating: Select the invoice button from the top of screen, Select Charge invoice from the menu, highlight the client from the listing and select OK. These selections will open the invoice form. The charge invoice functions in the same way as a cash invoice.
Order numbers: Select the order number field at the top of form enter the order number in either numeric or text format and finalise with the enter key.
Viewing Charge Invoices: Charge invoices can be viewed from either the diary invoices grid, sales display or the client form by selecting history and double clicking on the transaction.
Invoicing, Re-opening A Cash Or Charge Invoice: Closed invoices can be re-opened from either the client form or sales screen. Open the closed invoice by double clicking on the line item or highlighting and selecting edit. Select the reopen button on the lower menu bar of the invoice form enter the password / name / reason to reopen the invoice. Items or services can now be edited / deleted / added as required.
Invoice Sales Reporting: If parts are allocated to a service on the invoice. Parts and labour values will be displayed in the invoice / service summary report as a service component. However if a service is not selected parts will be listed under the Invoices section of the report.
Salesman, Adding To The Invoice: It is possible to record the salesman’s name on both the charge and cash sale invoice. Select the button to the right hand side of the salesman field, highlight the record required and select OK from the menu bar of the select a staff member display. The name is now recorded in the salesman field; these details will be printed under the financial summary of the invoice.
Vehicle Invoice, Creating: Select the invoice button from the top of screen, Select vehicle invoice from the menu. Select the client, vehicle and service required. The vehicle invoice functions in exactly the same way as an open job card except the details are not displayed in the date cells of the diary screen.
Vehicle Invoice, Accessing: The vehicle invoice can be accessed from the following: Sales, Diary, Client Form / History
Fig 5.13 Diary Screen / Open Invoices |
The eighth grid of the diary screen when in week view lists open vehicle, cash and charge invoice. To view an invoice, point and double click on the transaction. Closed invoices are not displayed in this grid
|
Credit Memo, Overview: A credit memo is used when a client returns previously purchased items or a refund is given on services performed. Auto Easy allows you to process a credit memo for the customer and pay the refund from a designated account. When the transaction is finalised all parts listed on a credit memo are placed back into stock.
Credit Memo, Creating: Select Activities / Create Credit Memo from the top menu highlight the required customer; confirm your selection with OK (F12). The credit memo form is now displayed. All functions on the credit memo work exactly the same as an invoice or job card.
Credit Memo, Adding A Part: Highlight Select the add part button to enter parts from either the catalogue listing or inventory file, to select an item type the part number into the search field and select by either pointing and clicking or pressing the enter key. Multiple selections are available from this screen, when all selections are made click on OK (F12). The items are entered into the parts and labour section of the job card, point at the quantity and financial fields click to edit, you can navigate using your arrow keys.
Credit Memo, Adding A Service: To add a service to the credit memo select add service. The service listing is now displayed select a service by moving the cursor with the arrow keys or pointing and clicking on the service description. This process will flag the service by placing a tick in the box to the right of the list; multiple services can also be flagged for importing to the job card. Selecting OK (F12) will paste your selections to the credit memo.
Credit Memo, Adding A Buy-in: Select the buy-in button, this opens the select a buy-in list, locate the item or items you are going to refund confirm with OK (F12). A message will request that you confirm conversion of the item to inventory (This is necessary as buy-ins are not held in inventory) select OK (F12). Buy-ins will appear in your parts listing as inventory once the memo is processed. The item is now listed in the parts and labour section of the memo; it is possible to alter retail prices if required.
Fig 5.14 Credit Memo
Credit Memos, Finalising: Select close from the menu bar if auto close is set to true you can allocate labour. If auto close is turn off and you wish to allocate labour select the labour button from the job update report. At the payment receipt form select the refund media and the account you wish to pay from. Undeposited funds contain payments that have been received but not deposited, if a payment is made from this account it will appear as a negative receipt in the receipts listing.
Credit Memos, Viewing: Closed credit memos can be accessed by opening the client listing, highlighting the record, clicking and selecting history from the client form. Double clicking on a transaction displays the details. Alternatively view from the sales screen
Quotations, Overview: Auto Easy has the ability to fully manage your quotations; functions include creation by customer and vehicle, reporting and conversion including automatic purchase order generation. It is easy to retain details of any parts required for individual jobs including supplier, cost and intended retail prices. Auto Easy tracks all quotations allowing for either the printing of a report or a quick view function from the sales screen. Converting quotes to jobs is as simple as a selecting the conversion option at the bottom of the quote form.
Quotations, Generating: Quotations can be created from the client form by selecting the quotes option from the bottom icon selection. Alternatively select activities / create quotes option from the menu
The quote option is located
at the bottom of the client form, to generate a new quote perform the
following:
1) Open the client form from the client listing by highlighting the client name double clicking on the line or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Alternatively you can create a quotation from the job card by selecting the client option from the bottom of the screen to open the client form.
2) Select the quotation option a list of vehicles owned by the customer is displayed, highlight the vehicle you wish to create the quotation for and select OK (F12).
3) A new quotation form is created displaying no transactions in the parts and labour section.
4) Select the service button, highlight the service required and click on the line item or press the enter key. Select any additional services in the same way, when completed select OK (F12) to paste your selections to the quotation form. Add parts to the quotation by highlighting the service record, clicking on parts, making your selections and confirming with OK (F12).
5) Add text to the work done field if required.
6) Select the print button to print a customer copy.
7) Save the quotation by selecting OK (F12).
Quotations, Adding Buy-ins: To apply a buy-in to a quotation you need to follow the same process as when adding to a job card, however when adding buy-ins to a job card you are simply retaining the details for conversion to a purchase order if the quotation is converted to a job card.
1) Highlight the service you are going to allocate the buy-in part to
2) Select buy-in from the row of options located below the parts and labour window
3) Highlight a suppliers from the list – select OK (F12)
4) Enter the purchase order number (or accept the sequential number) – press enter
5) Select an item from the buy-in list or add a new item by selecting new
6) Confirm selection with OK (F12)
7) Edit the line item if required
8) Select OK (F12) to save
Quotations, Creating A Buy-In Item: To add a new buy-in to the list select new from the bottom of the buy-in list and complete the following fields displayed on the Part Form / Buy-in:
Part: Description of the item
Part No: Manufacturers reference
Type: Auto select – Buy-in
Category: Use the button to the right and select from the category list
Income Parts: Default account
Cost: Inc or Ex
Price: Enter or select the calculator option
Tax: Default tax codes to change make a selection from the list
Included: Cost & Price includes or excludes tax
Fig 5.15 Part Form / Adding A Buy-in To A Quotation |
Selecting new from the menu bar of the select buy-in listing opens the part form in buy-in mode. Complete the fields and save OK (F12) the new item is automatically entered into the list and flagged for insertion to the job card.
|
Quotations, Viewing: Quotations can be viewed from either the client listing, Job card, booking form or sales screen.
Client Listing - Open the client form from the client listing by highlighting the client name double clicking on the line or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Alternatively you can view a quote from the job card or booking form by selecting the client option from either screen to access the client form. Select the history tab, click on the quotes button to list, to view details of a quotation point at the line item and double click.
Fig 5.16 Selecting Quotes View From The Client Form
Job Card - Select client from the bottom of the job card to display the client form. Select the history tab, click on the quotes button to list, to view details of a quotation point at the line item and double click.
Booking Form - Select client from the right hand side of the booking form to display the client form. Select the history tab, click on the quotes button to list, to view details of a quotation point at the line item and double click.
Sales Screen – To view quotations from the sales screen select the quotations option from the top of the display:
Fig 5.17 Selecting Quotes View From The Sales Screen
To view details point and click on the line item, if you wish to view quotations that were created in a different period select the date range required, to view all quotations select all from the drop down period menu.
Quotations, Reporting: Auto Easy allows you to print a report containing details of quotations for any date range. Select reports from the top of the screen, click on service reports, select quotation report from the sub menu.
Fig 5.18 Printing A Quotations Report |
Select the date range, only quotations created during those date will be printed on your report. |
The report displays client and vehicle details, quotation reference number, brief description and the total of the quote provided.
Fig 5.19 Quotation Report
When a quote is converted the converted column will display the job number.
Quotations, Converted Buy-ins: If your quotation included buy-ins you will notice these line items are displayed with an order reference in the parts and labour listing. The reference indicates that a purchase order containing the original detail is present in the purchasing module.
Fig 5.20 Buy-ins Converted To Orders
Receive items on order through the purchasing function by selecting the purchase order and converting to a bill, the job card is automatically updated.
Sales, Overview: The sales display lists invoices, jobs and credit memos including the status (open or closed) plus the financials of each transaction. The display includes date, open invoices and outstanding filters; it is also possible to search by client and invoice number. It is also possible to process payments from this screen by selecting the payments bottom from the bottom of the screen. Transaction history for an individual client can be viewed from the client form by selecting the history tab; transactions can be filtered by registration number. You also have access to a unique previous job search feature from the sales screen that allows you search for a previous transaction by key word, (must be in the text area of the job card) and make and model. This feature will assist you with quoting when the same job has been performed previously.
Select the sales button from
the top of the screen to display transactions
Sales, Accessing: To open the sales screen select the sales button from the top of the display, to view transaction details highlight a record, point and double click the job card or invoice is displayed. Select OK or Cancel from the job, invoice or credit memo screen to return to the sales listing.
Fig 5.21 Sales Screen
Sales, Selecting A Date Range: The screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date, open transactions are always displayed regardless of the date they were created. It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require.
|
|
You can also select the - from to dates- by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form |
Fig 5.22 Selecting Periods And Specifying A Date Range
Current: Shows cash sales, open and closed jobs/ invoices
Outstanding Balances: Outstanding balances are highlighted in red on the sales screen except for open jobs or invoices (Work In Progress) Credit balances that have not been processed are displayed as a figure enclosed in brackets ie: ($456.30). You can filter any records by date range or client: for instance if you wish to view all transactions with an outstanding balance select all from the date drop down menu.
Open Invoices: Displays all open invoices and jobs
Cash Sales:: Displays a list of cash sales in the selected period or date range
Quotes: Shows all quotes created within the selected date range or period
Bookings: Displays all booking for the date range or period
Closed Jobs: When selected only closed jobs / invoices populate the screen for the chosen period or date range
Sales, Searching By Client, Job Number, Registration & Order: To filter records by client select the button to the right of the view by client field, the client list is displayed, highlight the required client and select OK (F12) from the bottom of the client list, the client’s name is entered into the field, point and click in the check box above the clients name.
To search by job number, enter the invoice number you wish to reference into the view job # field, point and click in the checkbox. Follow the same procedure to search by registration number or order number, remember to tick the box above each field you wish to filter by. Search criteria can be by single or multiple filters.
Sales, Searching By Key Word, Make & Model: The sales screen allows you to search for previous jobs by Make, Model and keyword. To use this feature, select the button to the right of the make field, point and click on the make required, perform the same for model, finally enter the keyword you are searching by into the keyword field and tick the check box above the text.
|
It is essential that after selecting your search criteria you change the period or dates if the record is not found in the month to date. Using a combination of filters will narrow the search. |
Fig 5.23 Searching by Make, Model & Keyword
Sales, Multi Print Function: From the sales screen it is possible to print multiple copies of invoices, work orders and job cards. You can also choose to print checklists with job cards or invoices. To print multiples select transactions from the sales screen by pointing and clicking on the line, a tick is displayed in the checkbox. Point and click on the multi print icon at the bottom of the screen, select the form type and whether you wish to print checklists from the menu,
Sales, Viewing Totals: The totals at the bottom of the sales screen change according to the search criteria. Values equal total transaction value, amount paid and the outstanding balance.
Sales, Transaction Type: The sales screen displays the transaction type; there are 5 types which are:
Invoice = Job card (created from the diary)
Vehicle = Vehicle invoice (Created from Invoice / Vehicle Invoice Option)
Cash = Cash Sale
Charge = Invoice created without vehicle details
Credit = Credit memo
Receipts, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to process money received for jobs or invoices from the sales, job card, invoices, cash sale or receipts screen these screens can be bypassed by selecting Activities / Receive Payment from the top menu bar. Each option takes you to the payment receipts form which allows you to allocate payment to single or multiple invoices. Receipts are viewed from the receipts screen, outstanding monies are reported in the AR aging summary in current / 30 / 60 / 90 day format.
Fig 5.24 Payment Receipt Form |
Job Card, Processing Payment: Processing a payment as the job card is closed requires the operator to select payments from the job update screen if auto close procedure is not turned on. If this feature is used the payment receipt form will open automatically after selecting OK (F12) from the service reminder form. To process a payment you will notice the value of the invoice is recorded in the amount field. To accept payment select the payment media and either auto apply if or select the invoice by mouse clicking in the box to the right of the top of transaction. Selecting OK will display an updated job report and print a record of the payment on the invoice.
Note: Part payments can be allocated to the invoice from this screen.
|
Receipts, Accessing Payment Form: The payment form is available from the following screens:
Receipts
Select
Sales
Select
Job
Update Select
Alternatively select Activities / Receive payments option from the top of screen, each one of these options will open the payment receipt form. Opening the form from receipts and the activities menu requires you to search the client listing for the record you are going to allocate payment to. Opening the form from the sales screen automatically enters details of the highlighted transaction including the balance payable. Processing from the job update screen enters the value of the job or invoice just closed.
Fig 5.25 Payment Receipt Form |
The payment receipt form is split into three areas:
Client Details: Includes the client name, payment terms, credit limit and current balance.
Payment Details: Amount being allocated, media, account and transaction record.
Payment Allocation: List of outstanding invoices including outstanding balances |
Receipts, Processing Payment: The most popular way of processing payment is from the sales screen, as most clients do not pay as the job is finalised. If the payment option is not selected as the job is closed the amount is allocated to the clients account. The payment form lists ALL outstanding invoices for the client, enter the amount and media type account and record if required, next flag invoices that you wish to allocate payment to. The allocation and balance fields will change accordingly. If the amount to be paid equals the total balance select auto apply flagging all listed invoices, if you make a mistake reset will un-flag your selections.
|
Credit Card Payments: If a percentage value has been recorded in database settings the surcharge is automatically calculated and added to the invoice value. Select from the card selection menu and the recorded percentage is added to the invoice total. The surcharge is posted to an Income account titled Credit Card Surcharges, the total collected over any period can be viewed from the profit and loss report. |
Receipts, Editing From The Payment Receipt Form: To view / edit an existing receipt from the 70payment receipt form point and double click on the transaction, the receipt form will be displayed, edit as required click OK (F12) and you will return to the Payment receipt form, any previous selections will remain flagged.
Receipts, Selecting Payment Media: Click on the button to the right of the payment receipt form media field, from the drop down list select the payment media and click your selection is now visible.
Receipts, Unapplied Credits: Unapplied credits are payments received that have not been allocated to an outstanding invoice. For instance you may have received payment in advance for a job and wish to allocate the amount when the job is closed. Unapplied credits can be selected from the media type drop down menu located on the top right hand side of the receipt payment form, point and double click on your selection and the form will close, reselect to apply further payments to invoices.
Receipts, Applying Unallocated Payments: Auto Easy allows you to receive money without allocating the funds to an invoice; you may also delete a paid invoice without deleting the original payment. Both of these actions will result in an unallocated amount being credited to the client account. It is possible to apply these unallocated payments to subsequent invoices from the payment receipt form. If unallocated payments exist you will see the value displayed in red on the header of the form, the payments button is active when unallocated payments exist.
Fig 5.26 Displaying Unallocated Payments
To
apply unallocated payments select the payment icon, the receipts screen
opens displaying all unallocated payment for the client. To allocate an
amount point and click on the unallocated transaction which is indicated
by a red cross. The payment receipt form opens, apply the unallocated
values to outstanding invoices in the normal way.
Receipts, Selecting An Account: The default account is Undeposited funds, although payments can be directly credited to another current asset or bank account, if you wish to deposit a payment another account such as an EFT payment to your trading account select the button to the right of the account field from the list highlight the account you wish to post the payment to, confirm by using OK (F12). Payments can be allocated to bank or a fixed asset account. Accepting the Undeposited funds default will allow you to deposit funds to a bank account from the receipts screen.
Fig 5.27 Selecting A Posting Account From The Payment Receipt Form
Receipts, Accessing: To access the receipts screen select Accounts from the top menu, click on receipts from the drop down list.
Fig 5.28 Accessing Receipts |
The receipts screen displays all payments including account allocations. All transactions that have not yet been deposited are allocated to Undeposited funds (highlighted in red). When payments are deposited to an account the posting account is entered on the line item. It is possible to process new payments and create deposits from this screen. To view transaction details, highlight the record and double click or select edit to open the receipt form |
Receipts, Selecting Date: The screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date. It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
Fig 5.29 Receipts Screen
Receipts, Viewing Unallocated Payments: An unallocated payment is indicated by a red cross in the allocated field, if you wish to view just unallocated payments select the unallocated check box at the top of the screen. You will need to specify a date range by selecting from the drop down period selection or entering a from and to date
Receipts, Viewing Undeposited Payments: To view Undeposited payments select the undeposited check box at the top of the screen. Again the date selection will need to entered, if you are going to create a deposit it is suggested you select all from the date period menu.
Receipts, Viewing By Single Client: From the bottom of the receipts screen select the button to the right of the view by single client option. The client list is now in view, highlight the client and confirm with OK (F12) point and click on the check box above the field. Only transactions relating to the client are in view. You will need to select a period or date range if you wish to view transactions pre month to date.
Receipts, Searching By Amount: To search by value enter into the show amount field and tick the show amount box
Receipts, Editing: It is possible to edit a payment from the receipt screen, select the payment double click. Details of the payment are displayed; the amount can be edited and invoices un-flagged. Confirm with OK (F12), the changes are recorded against the original transaction.
Receipts, Purchase Payments: When paying suppliers it is possible to pay from Undeposited funds, the transaction is listed as a negative amount ie: ($110.00). Indicating this money which would normally be cash is missing from your undeposited funds. You create deposits from this screen; to ensure your deposit reconciles you need to select the negative transactions to deduct these values from your cash holding.
Receipts, Credit Memos: It is also possible to refund a client from Undeposited funds; these values will also appear as a negative indicating the cash is missing from your receipts. The negative receipts need to be selected when processing a deposit.
Receipts, Deleting: It is possible to delete a receipt which does not form part of a reconciled deposit. Auto Easy does not allow you to edit or delete transactions once they have been reconciled. Receipt deletions adjust the original transactions they were allocated to. For instance you process a payment of $500.00 against a $1,000.00 invoice leaving a balance of $500.00; if you delete the $500.00 receipt then the outstanding balance of the invoice will return to $500.00. To delete a receipt highlight the entry and select delete from the bottom of the screen. A warning box will request you confirm the request, if the transaction forms part of a reconciled deposit a message box will cancel the deletion.
Receipts, Processing A Payment: From the bottom of the receipts screen select new to open the payment receipts form. Select the button to the right of the client field, from the list highlight the required entry confirm with OK (F12). The payment receipt form lists ALL outstanding invoices for the client, enter the amount and media type, account and record if required, next flag invoices that you wish to allocate payment to. The allocation and balance fields will change accordingly. If the amount to be paid equals the total balance select auto apply flagging all listed invoices, if you make a mistake reset will un-flag your selections. Finalise by selecting OK (F12) from the payment receipts form.
Statements, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to produce client statements for any period. The statement form lists the opening balance, transactions, payments and a closing balance for the date range. When printing a statement for a client with sub-accounts transactions for each individual account are listed. The form also has a payment advice section that can be mailed back to you with payment.
Statements, Creating: Statements can be printed or emailed for all clients with balances other than zero or for selected clients. Select the activities menu, click on create statements, selecting outstanding will allow you to print statements or email all clients with an outstanding balance.
Choosing the selective option allows you to select individual or multiple clients you wish to print or email statements for from the client list. Both options will display a list of clients with outstanding balances, you now have the ability to select by what means you wish to deliver the statement either email or printed. If a client has an email address it is displayed in the window. When emailing to a selective listing simply select the records that have email addresses and choose email from the bottom of the display, these records will be deleted from the list when an email has been sent successfully, you are now able to select the remainder for printing.
Fig 5.30 Statement dispatch Selection
Fig 5.31 Date Selection
Statements, Printing Remittance Advice: If you wish to print or email a remittance advice with each statement select the option at the bottom of the task display.
Statements, Clients With Zero Balances: To ensure you do not print or email statements for client with a zero balance select the option from the message box.
Client Records & Transaction History, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate contains separate client and vehicle databases; vehicles are attached to a client. This structure gives the operator flexibility to move vehicles to a new owner. It is possible to search the client listing by any field displayed within the grid. It is possible to search any field by keyword; the operator can also index the client listing by any field in the display.
Client records are tabulated into the following displays:
v Contact Details: name, address, phone number and email etc.
v Profile: Account details, loyalty program, comments, pricing profile and effective media.
v History: Jobs, loyalty, RSA, quotes & reminders
v Tasks: Notes & Tasks
Client Listing
Client Listing, Viewing: There are two ways to open the client list, one by displaying the lists option at the top of the screen, highlighting clients from the drop down menu and selecting. The second and easier way is to select the client icon at the top of the screen.
Selecting this button from the
top of the screen will display your client listing.
The display includes company / surname, first name, home phone, work phone, mobile, address, client balance and discount rate if applied.
Fig 6.01 Client Listing
Email Addresses: When an email address is recorded on the client form a [@] symbol is displayed in the name field. Place your cursor over this symbol to read the email details
Client List displaying a symbol against client that have email addresses recorded
Client Listing, Searching: You can search the database by any field displayed. To select the field you wish to search by point at the field header and mouse click. The header text will be displayed in blue, to change the search field point and click on the next required header. Double clicking the field header will re-index the information grouping items with similar data. Type your query into the search field, the cursor will move to your selection. If you wish to expand the search select the button to the right of the field, the cursor will locate a record containing your query each time you select.
Client Listing, Creating A Record: Select new from the bottom menu bar of the clients display, the client form will display you will notice this has 3 tabs contact details, profile and history. To create a new record you need to complete the contact details and profile sections of the form.
Client Listing, Creating A Booking: Highlighting a client record and selecting the booking button from the lower menu bar of the display allows the operator to initiate a booking without having to return to the diary screen. When the function is selected the vehicle listing for the client is displayed, select highlight the vehicle you wish to make the booking for, confirm with OK (or F12). The service listing will be displayed; select the service / services required select OK (or F12) and complete the necessary fields on the booking form in the normal way.
Client Listing, Viewing Notes: When text is entered into the client comments field comments field a note graphic is displayed in the last column of the display. Access the comment by clicking on the note graphic once. Text can be edited / deleted from this screen, save your changes by selecting OK (F12).
Client
Listing, Viewing Vehicles: Select
the vehicle button from the bottom menu bar of the client listing. A vehicle
list is displayed including service information, it is also possible to
add new or edit existing vehicle information from the list.
Client Listing, Processing
Payment: Highlight the client from the listing and select payment,
the payment receipt form is displayed enter the value and allocate to
the invoices displayed in the body of the form.
Contact Details
Contact detail fields consist of the following:
Company / Surname: Enter the surname or company name
Private (default) / Business: Selecting business will disable the title and first name fields. The contact field however is accessible.
Parent: Allows the operator to pick a parent account for the client
Title: displays a pick list after clicking on the button adjacent to the field – selecting M will insert Mr. (not available in business mode)
First Name: ie: John (not available in business mode)
Contact: field records your prime company contact ie: John Smith (not available in private mode)
Title: displays a pick list after clicking on the button adjacent to the field – selecting M will insert Mr.
First Name: ie: John
Salutation relates to the way you wish to address your client in any communication ie: John or Mr. John Smith.
ABN: If a client’s ABN is entered in the contact details it will be recorded on all invoices for that client (not available in private mode).
Ph. Work / Ph Home / Fax / Mobile / Mobile 2 – Details are displayed on the client card and job card, SMS preferences, if you are using the SMS feature within Auto Easy select which mobile you prefer to send messages too.
Email: Enter the email address in this field – remember most email addresses are in lower case, if you require emails to be copied to another email address enter the details into email #2.
Address: Multiple lines
Billing Address: If the billing address is different from the physical address select the billing address tab and enter the billing address, this will then be printed on any subsequent invoice created.
Suburb: Type the suburb, then press Enter –The postcode will be entered automatically.
Client Listing, Creating A Sub Account: Enter client details as normal. Move your cursor to the parent field select the button to the right hand side, this will display your client listing. Select the client you wish to be the parent account, the database is indexed and can be searched by typing the client name you wish to attach this record to. With your cursor highlighting the entry point and left hand mouse click this will display the parent account in the parent field. If you wish the account address to be the parent select use parent address. Save the details by selecting OK or F12 from the bottom of the form.
Email Invoices – To email invoices directly to the client select the history tab from the client form, highlight the line containing the invoice you wish to email, point and click on the email function at the bottom of the display. If you wish to send multiple invoices move the cursor to highlight the required record and select the email button from the bottom of the form.
Select the profile tab from the client form to enter details
Fields include the following:
Account Number: is a free typing area that enters a unique identifier; however the number can be overwritten if required. Note: When terms other than cash are selected a letter C is placed in front of the account number indicating the client has credit terms.
Category: Allows you to segment your database for marketing purposes. Select the button to the right of the field, then select or add a new category to the list by selecting new from the bottom of the display entering the new category and saving by selecting OK (F12). Note: If track cost centres are set to true in program configuration Auto Easy forces the entry of a client category.
Charge & Blocked Accounts: Auto Easy allows you to record clients that have charge accounts, selecting this option from the client form / profile will display an asterisk against the record in the client listing.
To Block any further sales being made to a charge account client, select the blocked option, the title will display in red plus you will notice the client’s name is in red in the client listing. It is not possible to make a sales to a client that has been blocked
Fig 6.04 Selecting A Client Category |
Applying categories to your client base allows you to create customer groupings. This feature gives you the opportunity to target market your services.
|
Discount: If you wish to apply a discount to all invoices for this client enter a percentage value into the discount field. On closing a job or charge invoice for the client you will be prompted to apply the discount value, selecting no from this prompt will charge the invoice at the normal rate.
Discount: If you wish to apply a discount to all invoices for this client enter a percentage value into the discount field. On closing a job or charge invoice for the client you will be prompted to apply the discount value, selecting no from this prompt will charge the invoice at the normal rate.
|
Discount Notation – On the client profile screen there is now an additional field titled notation in the discount section of the form. Text entered is then printed on the invoice in the discount section.
|
Terms: Use the button to the right of this field to select payment terms, if the client is cash the field can be left empty.
Credit Limit: Enter a maximum value, if this amount is exceeded a warning message will be displayed, for cash clients leave the field blank.
Gold Key Advantage ( Only): If the client is a Gold Key member select this option
Current Balance: Total amount outstanding, if the amount is displayed in brackets the client is in credit.
Loyalty Programme: Status including loyalty points to date and date loyalty plan initiated.
Prompt For Order Number On Job Close: Select if you wish to be reminded to enter an order number as you close a job card
Comments: Is a free typing area where the operator can make specific global notes on issues relating to the customer
Cheque Authorisation: Tick the box if you authorise payment by cheque from the client. Auto Easy will warn the operator if authorisation is not set to true when processing cheque payments for non-authorised clients.
Pricing Profile: This facility allows the operator to preset the pricing level for the client. Prices applied to the job card depend on the values entered in the services, labour or parts files. It is possible to set varying price structures for clients for example; Labour can be set at standard, parts wholesale and fixed price services at trade. To select a price profile point and mouse click on the appropriate radio button. Pricing profiles can be set at any time and will be applied to the next job for the client.
Media Database: A report can be generated that sorts this information into adverting types including number of responses. This feature gives you an easy way of tracking the success / failure of any promotion you may have in place, to select mouse click on the appropriate radio button.
Account Keeping Fee: Auto Easy allows you to apply a fee to clients that have charge accounts, to use this feature you need to perform the following:
Open File / Settings / Database Settings enter the account keeping fee into the appropriate field located on the bottom left hand side of the form
Save the setting by selecting OK (F12) from the settings screen
The next step is to flag the clients who will attract an account keeping fee, to perform this task open the client form.
|
To the right of the preferred payment type is a checkbox titled account keeping fee, to select point and click in the box. Save with OK, you will now note that the account number field is highlighted in blue indicating an account keeping fee has been applied. |
|
To process account keeping fees, select admin / process account keeping fees. A list of clients attracting the fee is displayed; there is an option at the bottom of the list to remove any clients to who you do not want to charge the fee. To delete simply highlight the appropriate record and select remove, to process the remaining records select the process option from the bottom menu. The amount is applied via a charge invoice and will be listed on a clients statement as an account keeping fee |
Applying Account Keeping Fees
Note that it is possible to change the default account keeping fee from this screen, simply highlight the value and re-type the correct entry. Exit the screen by selecting done.
Preferred Payment Method – It is possible to record the preferred payment method including credit card details on the client card. When payment is processed the preferred method is entered automatically onto the receipt form. Credit card details are protected if security is being used, the option must be selected in the user profile.
|
Select the client preferred payment option in security to allow access to credit card details. |
Entering Details – Open the client form, select the profile tab, click on the preferred payment option, from the drop down list select the payment method. Save your setting with OK (F12).
Setting The Preferred Payment Method
If credit card is selected as the payment type an option to enter the credit card details is displayed
|
Enter the credit card type by selecting from the drop down list, enter the credit card number followed by the expiree date. Save the details with OK (F12). Note the credit card details are secured in the database by 128 bit encryption so it is not possible to view these details from the data source. |
Receiving Payment – The preferred payment method is automatically entered into the receipt form, if credit card details are stored the credit card type is entered with the details being able to be retrieved by clicking on the yellow arrow next to the media type.
Receiving Payment using stored details
Selecting the history tab from the client form allows you to view information relating to the following:
v Jobs
v Loyalty
v RSA
v Quotes
v Reminders
v Payments
To display change the views select the drop down list from the show field located on the top left hand side of the client form
Fig 6.05 Changing The History View
Jobs – Displays all current and closed jobs including the value and paid to date amount and balance, to view details click on the transaction
Loyalty – Displays loyalty points accrued by invoice
RSA – Records RSA issues by job
Quotes – Displays all quotes prepared for the client that have not been converted to jobs
Payments – Displays all payments for the date range selected to view payment details click on the transaction.
Reminders – The history / reminders form displays all service reminders sent or due to be sent to the client including the service due, date and odometer. An extra feature of this display is the done column; this will contain either yes or no. If the service due is performed within 90 days of the service date yes will be entered indicating the service reminder was successful. This screen can also be used as a reference to view when the next service is due including type/date /odometer
History, Quick View: To access vehicle history for the last 12 months select the balance amount from the client listing this will display 12 months of transaction history, use filters if you wish to change the view.
History, Filtering By Vehicle:: Select the arrow to the right of the filter field displaying all, a drop down menu displays vehicle registrations. To view the histories for a specific vehicle select the registration. Only the transactions relating to the selected vehicle are now in view. To return to all jobs select the filter field, all jobs, all transactions for the client are displayed.
Invoices, Deleting: Select the delete button from the bottom menu bar. Note: only closed jobs can be deleted from this screen, the following procedure is required:
1) Highlight the job to be deleted – this must be a closed invoice or job
2) Select the delete option from the bottom menu bar
3) Enter details for the deletion
4) Confirm with OK or F12
Note: When deleting an invoice, inventory items are placed back into stock, buy-ins are converted to inventory items. To adjust inventory quantities or remove buy-ins selects inventory or purchasing and makes the necessary changes.
Tasks
Client Form, Tasks: The contact manager allows you to record notes and tasks. Notes are text records that record the contact type, consisting of direct, email, fax letter or phone. You can record tasks to be performed at a predetermined time; new tasks are listed on the client form and in the task manager.
Fig 6.07 Task History
Creating A New Task |
Client Form, Creating A New Task: To create a new task select the task button at the bottom of the client form. Enter a title for the task in the first field, next select the arrow to the right of the for field. A list of options is displayed including the ability to set the task for a specific user, group or anyone. The date will automatically default to today in the due field, if you wish to change this select the button to the right, point and double click on your selection; the date is entered in the field. Next select the time you wish to perform the task. If you wish to be reminded (authorised users only) select the remind option followed by the down arrow to the right of the field displaying 30 minutes before, make your choice from the drop down menu by double clicking. The reminder can also be repeated on a daily / weekly / fortnightly or monthly basis. Select repeat followed by the field to the right of your selection.
|
Editing A Task: To edit a task go to diary day or week view or the client form tasks option, point and double click on the task you wish to edit, make the changes and save using OK (F12).
Task Manager, Deleting A Task: If you wish to delete a task open the task manager in day or week view, highlight the entry you wish to delete and press the delete button on you keyboard, confirm your action from the message box by selecting yes.
Comments
The comments area comprises of a text field where relevant information can be stored, when text is entered into this field a note it icon is displayed against the customer record in client listing.
Vehicle Records & Services Due
Vehicle Records & Services Due, Overview: The vehicle and client databases have been designed so they are independent of each other. Auto Easy Ultimate allows you to attach a vehicle / vehicles to clients. It is not possible to add a new vehicle to the database without first selecting a client from the listing. Vehicle records store information in the following sections of the vehicle form:
v Vehicle Details: Registration, make, model, year / month of manufacture etc.
v Servicing: Last service. Next service and type, registration renewals and RSA details
v Service Notes: Special servicing notes and drivers name
Vehicle Listing
Vehicle Listing, Viewing: You will be able to open the vehicle listing from any display that has the vehicle button on the bottom menu bar. Alternatively the listing can be accessed in two other ways. Select lists / vehicles from the top of the screen, or the vehicles icon.
Opens the full vehicle listing
display.
Select if you wish to view
the vehicle listing for a specific client.
Vehicle Listing, Viewing The Vehicle Form: Highlight the record select edit, press F2 or point and double mouse click to view the record
Vehicle Listing, Searching For A Client By Vehicle: Select vehicles (Click on Vehicle Button) use the search function to locate the vehicle. Click on client option to view the owner.
Fig 6.09 Vehicle Listing
Note: From this screen additional information is recorded relating to the next service due and roadside assistance issue. The data displayed in these fields is automatically posted from the service reminder function when the job is closed. Fields can be edited from this screen however you must remember to select F12 or click on OK when exiting to save any new information – esc / cancel will discard any changes. If you wish to view vehicle notes point and single click on the note graphic displayed.
Vehicle Listing, Creating A Booking: It is also possible to create a booking from the vehicle listing. Open the vehicle listing and highlight the vehicle you wish to complete the booking for. Select the booking button located on the lower menu bar of the display window. The service listing will be displayed. Select the service / services required select OK (or F12) and complete the necessary fields the booking form in the normal way.
Selecting the booking button
allows you to create a booking without opening the diary.
Vehicle Details
Vehicle details contain the following fields:
Registration |
Automatically types in upper case |
Odometer |
Enter the current speedometer reading |
Make |
Type the make ie: Ford, there is a pick list selected by the button to the right |
Model
|
When the make has been entered into the appropriate field models can be accessed |
Model |
Enter the model code ie: EB, 520i |
Series |
Enter the series from the drop down selection |
Engine Type |
Select from the drop down list |
Month |
Select from the choices displayed |
Engine Type |
Select from the drop down list |
Series From |
First manufacture date |
Series To |
Last manufacture date |
Year |
Select the button to the right of the field and select the year |
Colour |
Select from drop down list or free type |
Type |
Select pick list by using the button to the right |
EFI, Auto, Air-con, Power St. ABS |
Flag the appropriate box |
Cylinders |
Enter a numeric into this field |
VIN Number |
Free typing field |
Tyre Sizes Front |
Free typing field |
Yre Sizes Rear |
Free typing field |
Engine Capacity |
Free typing field |
Engine Number |
Free typing field |
Fuel Type |
ULP, PULP, LRP, LPG, Diesel – Pick-list |
Seating Capacity |
Enter numeric value |
Doors |
Free typing field |
Radio Pin |
Free typing field |
GMV |
Free Typing Field |
Reference |
Enter Alphas / Numeric if applicable |
Security |
Free typing field |
Vehicle Owner, Changing: Select
owner icon from the bottom menu bar, enter the client listing is now in
view, select the client you wish to be the new owner, note you can add
a new client from this screen by selecting Insert / New. Complete the
process by selecting F12 or click on OK. A message box confirms the change
of owner.
Vehicle Servicing
Fig 6.11 Vehicle Form / Servicing |
The vehicle servicing screen records service details. Functions allow the operator to add / edit or remove scheduled services. Information relating to RSA issue, cover period and registration / warrant details can also be viewed / edited or added. The operator has an option to select the duration between rego / warrant checks by selecting either 6 or 12 months. When the next service date is reached Auto Easy moves the date forward according to the selection.
|
Vehicle Servicing, Adding Service Reminders: Select the service reminders button
Fig 6.12 Service Reminder Form |
Select add from the bottom of the form, this action opens the service listing. Select the service or services required a tick is visible against each of your selections. When complete select OK (F12) to save.
Fig 6.13 Setting Distance / Duration |
Enter the distance to travel and duration between services into the fields provided. New services are added to the bottom window of the service reminder form. Select add from the bottom of the form, this action opens the service listing. Select the service or services required a tick is visible against each of your selections. When complete select OK (F12) to save
Vehicle Servicing, Deleting Service Reminders: Select clear from the bottom of the top display. This action will clear all future services recorded for the selected vehicle. Note: It is not possible to clear a single service from this screen. Services will have to be recorded using the add function situated under the new service reminder window. You can however remove a single service from the new services window before saving.
Vehicle Servicing, Editing New Service Reminders: You can edit new service reminders by highlighting the record, selecting change and editing the distance / time until next service fields.
Fig 6.14 Rego/ Warrant reminders
Registration / Warrant Of Fitness Renewals, Adding: It is possible to add registration and warrant of fitness renewals either on the vehicle or booking form. Auto Easy also provides a 6 month or 12 month option between servicing. To select, simply point and click in the required field. These options are also available from the booking form. Auto Easy will automatically move the due date forward according to the time selection when the next date of check is due.
Fig 6.15 Roadside Assistance Cover
Vehicle Servicing, Roadside Assistance Cover: The roadside assistance details can be viewed from the vehicle record; these are automatically entered when the roadside assistance option is selected in settings. The membership number consists of your site id followed by the sequential membership number.
Vehicle Comments
Fig 6.16 Vehicle Form / Service Notes |
Vehicle service notes are used to make notations that relate to the serving of a particular vehicle, you can also record the name of the vehicle driver.
Opening Comments: Select the service comments tab from the vehicle form to display servicing notes and the driver name.
Adding Comments: Type in the notes section of the display and save by selecting OK (F12).
|
Service Notes, Deleting: Highlight the text in the comments section and select delete, save your changes by selecting OK (F12).
Service Notes, Viewing From The Job Card: If a vehicle has service notes attached the vehicle button at the bottom of the job will have changed from
to
Selecting
the vehicle button will open the vehicle record, select vehicle notes
to view the details. Cancel (ESC) closes the vehicle form.
Service History
Fig 6.17 Vehicle Service History |
Clicking on the history tab displays the service history in date range order (most recent at the top of list). Included is the clients name, date, job number, sales type, service descriptor and total value.
Viewing Previous Jobs: Point and double mouse on the record you wish to view. To return to the vehicle form click on OK (F12) or Cancel (ESC) from the job card.
Note: It is possible to change the vehicle owner from any section of the vehicle form by clicking on the owner button on the lower menu bar. |
Vehicle History Transferring: Allows vehicle history to be transferred to another client and vehicle, a record remains on the original client form however all outstanding amounts for the job are transferred to the new client / vehicle.
To transfer history between clients / vehicles go to the vehicle listing, highlight the vehicle you wish to transfer history from, open the vehicle form, select history
New history option located at the bottom of the vehicle form
Entering the new client and vehicle
Select OK (F12) from the transfer vehicle history form this action will transfer the history to the new client and vehicle. A record remains on the original client form with all outstanding balances transferred.
Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate allows the operator to sell services on a fixed (parts included) or non-fixed price basis (parts plus labour). Services can also contain a parts kit, standard text and attachments, to simplify the addition of text to a standard invoice or job card there are two text databases that can be linked to the service. Selecting text lines from these databases will automatically insert text to the work done field or print an attachment to the invoice as a checklist.
Service records control the next service due, loyalty triggers, point allocation, redemption value and the issuing of roadside assistance. It is also possible to view the transaction history for a single service from the service form.
|
|
Above are two examples that show the parts and labour allocation for both fixed price and mechanical services. Essentially fixed price services take a total value deduct the normal retail of parts added and allocate the remainder to labour. Mechanical services allow the operator to fix the labour component and add parts accordingly. Auto Easy allows the operator to set service prices including or excluding tax, regardless of selection the price file will always display the price including tax.
Service Listing
Service Listing, Viewing: The service listing can to opened by using the following
Selecting this icon from the
menu bar at the top of the screen will open the service listing. Alternatively
you can select the lists option above the icons at the top of the screen
and choose services.
The service listing can also
be opened from a job card, charge invoice or cash sale by selecting the
add service button. When creating a booking the add button located below
the services section allows access to the service listing.
Fig 6.18 Service Listing
Services Listing, Searching: Code is the default search field, indicated by blue text of the header record. To service for a service by code type into the search field, the cursor will move to the first record containing the text or alphas entered. It is possible to change the search field by pointing to the header record of the field you wish to search by, on selection the header text will change to blue. The listing can also be indexed by any field displayed, simply point at the header record and double mouse click the order will change according to whether ascending or descending is selected.
Service Management
Service: Type the full name of the service you wish to add into this field ie: Brake Wheel Cylinder Replacement. The description is displayed in the service listing.
Code: This is your search code ie: Brake Wheel Cylinder Replacement could be abbreviated to WCBR, Minor Service to MS etc. The code must be unique.
Fixed Price: If the service is sold on a fixed price basis tick the box.
Hidden: When selected the record will no longer be displayed in the service listing.
Category: Allows for the allocation of a category to each service record. Select the button to the right of the field to view / select a category.
Account: Default account is labour (income account), do not change this account unless you wish to allocate to a specific income account. Fixed price services automatically allocate parts and labour sales to the correct income accounts.
Follow On Service: This function allows you to select the next you wish your client to be reminded of. Select the button adjacent to the field your service listing is now displayed select the next service and save with the OK function.
Months: Enter the duration ie: 3 means if a service was performed on the 1st. January the selected service will be due on the 1st. April.
Kilometers: The amount of estimated kilometers the vehicle needs to travel before the next service is due.
Price: Auto Easy allows for the entry of three pricing levels, Standard, Wholesale and Trade.
Tax: Your default tax code is automatically entered into this field; if you wish to change the code select the button to the right of the field. A new tax code can now be selected from the tax table.
Included: The selection defaults to true, to enter values excluding tax point at the tick and mouse click prices displayed now exclude tax.
Notes: Free typing field to a maximum of 256 characters
Loyalty and Roadside Assistance
Loyalty Program: To assist operators retain clients Auto Easy Ultimate has the ability to allocate points to a client reward account based on dollars spent. It is suggested these points can be redeemed for a free service, functionality allows for the entry of a redemption value on the service record. A statement of points to date is also printed on the invoice if the track loyalty point’s function is selected in the site settings. The loyalty function can be an extremely valuable marketing tool for any automotive repairer.
Loyalty Program, Site Settings: Select file / settings from the top of the screen go to the program options tab flag track loyalty points to true, save with OK or F12. Next you need to decide which services will initiate the loyalty program, how many points will be allocated for each dollar spent on those services and which services will have a redemption value and how much. Once these decisions have been made you are ready to set your loyalty parameters for each service.
Loyalty Program, Triggering: Go to the section on the service form / details titled loyalty, there are three fields, when a service with a trigger set to true is performed points will be accrued for each subsequent service that is flagged to issue points. No reward statement will be printed on the invoice if the loyalty program has not been initialised.
|
Field Name |
Function |
Loyalty Trigger |
Service will trigger the loyalty plan if set to true | |
Points Per Dollar |
Points allocated per $ spent on the service | |
Point Cost |
The redemption value entered in points |
Loyalty Program, Redeeming A Reward Service: Enter the service onto the job card in the normal way, select the service from the parts & labour section of the job card by pointing an double clicking on the line item. Flag the field use loyalty points to true, the clients reward account will be checked to ensure there are enough points available to cover the service if the account does not cover the point value a message will be displayed. If the account contains enough points to cover the service the points will be deducted from the total and the retail price of the service is displayed as zero.
Note: The service must be flagged with a redemption value to be used as a reward service
Roadside Assistance: It is also possible to cover vehicles for roadside assistance (RSA) by flagging the field trigger RSA on the service form. When a service is performed with the choice set to true roadside assistance details will be printed at the bottom of the invoice including contact phone number and RSA membership number. Vehicles flagged for the issue of roadside assistance can be exported using the Internet facility or setting up the necessary form letter in Microsoft Word can produce membership cards in house.
Roadside Assistance, Viewing Details: Roadside assistance details can be viewed from the vehicle record or vehicle listing, note the RSA number is the site id followed by the membership number.
Auto Easy allows you to attach two types of text record to a service:
1) Work Done: Placed in the body of the invoice
2) Attachments: Printed as a three column checklist attached to the invoice, option to print attachments when the job card or invoice is finalised.
Work Done, Viewing: You can view the work done text database by selecting lists / work done from the top of the screen. Alternatively the list can be opened from the services form / parts/text by selecting the add button located below the work done text area. Work done is also available from the booking form, job card and invoice.
Fig 6.20 Service Form / Parts/Service Text |
Service Form, Adding Work Done: Open the parts/service text form select add, the work done listing is displayed. To add a new record select new from the bottom of the listing enter a code and type your description into the field provided. Save by selecting OK (F12).
Fig 6.21 Adding Text To Wok Done |
Service Form, Adding Attachments: The procedure for adding attachments is very similar to adding work done. Select add from the bottom of the attachments section, the attachment listing is displayed from the list search for the required record highlight, mouse click or press enter a tick is displayed at the end of the line, multiple selections can be made from the list. Selecting OK (F12) will insert the attachments. Attachments are printed as an extra sheet with the invoice, it is suggested you use attachments as checklists and include no more that 40 characters per line to accommodate the 3 x column format of the report.
Fig 6.22 Selecting Attachments 6.23 Attachment Details
Attachments, Adding: To add a new record select new from the bottom of the listing enter a code and type your description into the field provided. Save by selecting OK (F12).
Attaching Parts To A Service
Services, Adding Parts: Parts can also be attached to a service record; your entries will automatically be inserted onto the job card or invoice when the service is selected. To add parts select the service form/text/parts/service text form, point and mouse click on the add button to the right of the parts included section of the form. From the parts listing you can select single or multiple parts (inventory or catalogue), selecting OK (F12) from the bottom of the parts listing allows for entry of quantity by item.
Fig 6.24 Service Form – Parts Included |
Parts included lists quantity, part number and part description of items attached to a service
|
Services, Parts Included, Removing: Highlight the item you wish to remove select the remove button to the right of the list confirm the deletion by selecting OK (F12).
Services, Parts Included, Changing: Highlight the item you wish to edit and select the change button located to the right of the parts list. You now have the option to change the quantity, save by selecting OK (F12).
Services, Item Sales: Selecting item sales will display in both statistical and graphical format the sales history for the past 12 months.
Parts & Inventory, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate has the ability to sell parts as catalogue or inventory items. Catalogue items have no stock control and as such no record flows through to quantity on hand., The cost price for catalogue items can be edited from the parts listing, job card or invoice. Cost and retail for non-inventory items (catalogue) are posted to cost of goods sold, income and an other current assets account titled non-inventory purchases.
It is suggested the operator take full advantage of the powerful inventory management functions of Auto Easy Ultimate which including category management, stock take reporting by category or location. To ensure inventory management is a breeze we have included pricing and inventory management utilities that allow for global price changes and automatic conversion of catalogue items to inventory.
This chapter also explains how you can save time by attaching a key board wedge scanner giving you the ability to scan barcodes and enter items straight to the invoice or job card without touching the keyboard.
Parts Listing, Searching By Barcode: To search by barcode select scan from the bottom of the screen, the scan entry field is displayed, scan the part required and the cursor will locate the item.
Category Management: Categories and sub categories can be setup by selecting lists / categories. It is good practice to add a category to each inventory, catalogue or service item as many functions and reports within Auto Easy are category based. For instance adding a category to an item gives the operator an opportunity to track sales and profitability for a defined group of parts or perform a stock take by single or multiple categories.
Category Management, Adding New Categories: From the top of the screen select lists / categories, or view from the part and services form. Select new from the bottom of the list, your category form is now in view. To enter a new category or sub category type your entry into the category field ie: Batteries, spark plugs, electrical etc. It is also possible to create sub categories, for instance you may stock two types of batteries Exide and Century if you wish to track sales and run re-order reports by supplier setup two sub categories by attaching the Exide and Century entries to the master category batteries. Select parts, services or supplier as a grouping.
Fig 7.02 Category Details |
Category Management, Deleting Categories: The system will not allow you to delete categories that have been assigned to items by selecting the delete function at the bottom of the listing. However if you wish to not list a category it can be hidden from view by selecting the hidden option on the category form. Essentially this option retains the category for data integrity purposes even though it can no longer be accessed from the main screen. |
1) Open the category listing by selecting lists from the top of the screen point and click on the category option in the drop down menu.
2) Point and double click on the category you wish to set the markup for, the category detail form is displayed.
3) Point and click on the default markup checkbox, you can now enter values into the corresponding fields.
4) Select the arrow to the right of the first field, select the $ or % sign, enter the value into the next field, click on the arrow of the third field, select more than or less than (less than should only be used if setting by RRP) finally select the calculation criteria either Cost or RRP, save with OK (F12).
To reference your markup settings go to the category list the value and calculation criteria is displayed in the right hand column.
Catalogue Parts, Creating: To create a new catalogue item open the parts listing and select new from the bottom of the display. This action opens the part form which has three tabulated choices details and purchasing and sales. Details contain the item setup data, purchasing information including supplier and invoice number, this choice does not apply to catalogue items as there is no purchasing history. Sales detail the sales history including client and invoice number.
Fig 7.03 Part Form / Inventory |
Using the Calculator is an easy way to calculate gross profit or mark up margins for retail, wholesale and trade prices.
|
Part Form, Calculate function: Allows you to automatically calculate selling prices and or profit margins including or excluding tax based on cost or percentage. Enter one value into the price, gross profit, gross profit% or mark up field press tab and all fields will be calculated. The form defaults to include tax, if you wish to exclude de-select the amounts include tax box.
Part Form, Fields: Consist of the following:
Part: Enter the part description
Part No. Manufacturer’s part number
Type: Include: Each has unique use within the system.
1) Catalog: Assigned to items that have no stock control. Note: Auto Easy Ultimate is based on double entry accounting principles; as such it is not possible to record single sided entries. The chart of accounts contains a default non-inventory purchases other current asset which records the cost of all catalogue items, the operator will have to transfer funds from this account to compensate for the cost of these items.
2) Inventory: Stock levels are recorded for inventory items, values are posted to current assets as inventory on hand. It is also possible to raise purchase orders for inventory items and receive items through the purchasing function.
3) Buy-In: Special category of inventory item relating to parts that are purchased for individual jobs or invoices.
4) Other: This option is used to classify expenses and other transactions ie: Telephone, accounting, rent etc.
Category: Ability to assign an item to a category, selecting the button to the right of the field displays a list, highlight the entry required and select OK (F12) from the bottom of the category list will insert the category to the part form.
Income Account: Selecting the button to the right allows for the posting of sales to another income account. Default income account is parts unless you wish to track income separately for this item it is not necessary to change the posting.
COGS Account: The default for all parts is Cost Of Goods Sold, however new COGS accounts can be attached to individual parts by selecting the button to the right of the field, creating a new account and attaching the selection to the form.
SKU: Stock look up reference
Class: Gives the operator the ability to enter classes for specific items
Location: Allows you to record the location of a particular item, ie: Shelf 1, Bin 44 etc. Auto Easy Ultimate allows for stock takes to be performed by item location.
Bar Code: Auto Easy generates a default bar code when the module is registered for use. Alternatively manufacturer’s bar codes can be scanned directly into this field. Addition of a hand scanner allows for items to be scanned directly onto the job card or invoice.
Units: Defaults to each, however this is a free typing field and is easily customised ie: Litre, pair etc.
Hidden: Select if you wish to no longer include the item in the parts list.
Cost: What you paid for the item (based on unit cost).
Price: Standard, wholesale, trade Auto Easy allows you to record three price levels.
Tax: Displays default tax code, selecting the right hand button allow for entry of a new tax code.
Included: Default is tax included this can be de-selected to present data excluding tax.
Min. Stock: Enter the minimum quantity you wish to carry on hand
Max. Stock: Enter the maximum quantity you wish to stock
Alternative Part: If you wish to use an alternate when this item is out of stock select the button to the right of the alternative part field and select the item from your parts list, click OK (F12) from the bottom of the parts display and the part number is entered into the field.
Fig 7.04 Selecting An Alternative Part
Quantity First Calculation: This option t when set to true will divide the retail price into the total for the line item and record the quantity sold rather than changing the unit price of the item. Example: Part Retail $1.45 item is entered onto an invoice operator changes the total value to $14.50 the quantity sold = 10 which is displayed on the invoice / job form
If you apply an inventory item to a job or invoice that has an alternate part attached and the selection is out of stock although there is stock of the alternate part on hand a prompt will advise you to apply the alternate part. Selecting no will paste the original selection to the job card / invoice
|
|
When creating a catalogue item ensure the type box contains the catalog selection, when all fields are complete select OK (F12) from the bottom of the part form to save.
Parts Listing, Displaying Hidden Parts: Point at the show hidden tick box located at the bottom of the list and mouse click. Only hidden parts will be displayed. If you wish to display a part that has been previously hidden, highlight the item and select edit, point at the hidden selection and mouse click save you selection by selecting OK(F12).
Parts Comments Tab: A text area where you can enter notes relating to the supplier, when text is entered a note it icon is displayed at the end of the line in the supplier listing clicking on the icon will display text entered in the field
Inventory Items, Viewing Listing: Inventory can be viewed from the parts listing or by selecting Activities / Inventory from the top menu bar. The inventory screen provides filtering of records
Fig 7.08 Viewing Purchasing & Sales History |
Inventory History, Filtering: The history display allows the operator to view transactions over a specified date range or period. To view by period select the button to the right of the field displaying month to date, point and click on the period required from the drop down menu. The data may take a few seconds to load if there are lots of transactions. Alternatively a specific date range can be entered in the from / to date field at the top of the display. Dollar values include tax. It is possible to drill down to the invoice or job card from the sales list by pointing and clicking on the transaction. To drill down to the suppliers bill, click on the purchasing tab – point and double click on the line open, the bill is in view.
Note: Catalogue items are not included in the sales totals; they are however displayed in brackets flagged with an asterisk.
|
Inventory History, Item Sales: From the part form you can view the sales performance of an item over the past 12 moths in both statistical and graphic formats. To run this report select Item sales from the bottom of the part form
Selecting this icon from the
bottom of the form displays the last 12 months sales data
.
Fig 7.09 Item Sales For The Last 12 Month Period
The parts / inventory utility allows the operator to delete unwanted parts from the listing and convert remaining parts to inventory either globally or by category. There is also an option that allows for the import of parts from either the working directory C:\Program Auto Easy Ultimate, A: Drive or the internet.
Inventory Utility, Parts Processing: To access the parts / inventory utility select Activities / Parts & Inventory Utility from the top of the screen. The utility is now in view, from this screen the operator can perform the following:
1) Delete unused parts
2) Convert non-inventory parts to inventory
3) Select either function by category
4) Calculate Minimums and maximum stock holdings
5) Import a parts update file
Inventory Utility, Converting Parts To Inventory: Point and flag the convert non-inventory into inventory, to make all parts inventory select process. If you only wish to add specific items these can be selected by flagging the apply to category box and choosing a category. It is only possible to choose one category per process, select OK from the category display, and select process from the utility screen.
Note: Inventory and buy-ins cannot be deleted from the database, they can however be hidden from view by selecting the hidden option on the part form.
Remove Parts From Parts Pick List: To maintain data integrity Auto Easy Ultimate does not allow for deletion from the parts listing of items allocated to jobs. However this feature allows the operator to no longer display unwanted items in the parts listing. To remove items select the option and flag items for removal from the parts listing and confirm with OK.
Assign Location: Use this option to assign stock locations to individual parts. To assign locations to items select the option and flag single or multiple items from the parts listing and confirm with OK.
Convert To Inventory: Select this option to convert catalogue items to inventory, single or multiple items from the parts listing and confirm with OK
Inventory Min / Max Values
This feature allows you to set the minimum and maximum quantities for inventory items in 2 ways
1) Manually – Enter the minimum and maximum values to be applied to all inventory items
2) Calculate Based On Sales – Select the period from the drop down menu you wish to use to calculate the min / max quantities. Auto Easy will calculate the average monthly sales of each inventory item. The monthly sales volume will be entered into the maximum field a corresponding value of 50% of the maximum value will be placed into the minimum field.
To re-calculate the values select the set values option from the Parts / Inventory Utility
Inventory Utility, Importing Parts Update
Download: This function allows for updating of the parts file from the Genesis FTP server, the price file directory is set in the control variables. This setting will vary between organisations and individual users. To update the price file via Internet select download, from the parts update screen select download now. You will now be connected to the server via your Internet server; the required file will be imported into your program updating your price file.
Import: Parts listings can be imported via the parts update function. Copy the Parts.Mdb file into the working directory or a floppy disk, select auto find. The file name and location is displayed in the path to parts update file field, select import to append the parts file.
The pricing utility allows you to change prices by category or sub category for catalogue, inventory and services. Options allow for the input of three price point changes standard, trade and wholesale. Trade and wholesale can be based on either of the other price points or cost price of the item.
Essentially using the pricing utility will save time when updating price points and allows the operator to determine trade and wholesale rates by using any of the three prices already recorded. Price changes can be entered as either a percentage or dollar amount.
Price Utility, Accessing: To access the utility select Activities / Pricing utility from the top menu bar. The display comprises of two sections:
1) Prices to adjust
2) Apply to
Price Utility, Applying price points by dollar value: To change prices by a dollar value select the button to the right hand side of the % field from the pick list select the $ sign, this will now be displayed in the box to the left. Repeat this for each price point you wish to change. Enter the values into the second column, select the price point by flagging adjust Standard, adjust Trade and adjust wholesale.
Any one or combination can be applied. Next select whether the price is going to increase / decrease. Select more than or less than from the pick list attached to column three. Next select the price of which the increase / decrease is to be based upon – Current value, standard, wholesale or trade. Finally you need to indicate which class or class / category the price changes are to be applied to. You can select a category / sub category from the prick list at the bottom of the form. If you are changing prices for a specific category flag parts, to apply a global change to all parts select parts only and not category. The same formula applies to services. To execute select adjust on the bottom left hand side of the display
Price Utility, Applying price points by percentage: At the pricing utility display enter the percentage increase into the first column, indicate which price points you wish to change. Select less than / more than from the pick lists in the third column, next select the value on which the price changes will apply in the fourth column. Finally you need to indicate which class or class / category the price changes are to be applied to. You can select a category / sub category from the prick list at the bottom of the form. If you are changing prices for a specific category flag parts, to apply a global change to all parts select parts only and not category. The same formula applies to services. To execute select the adjust button on the bottom left hand side of the display.
Price Utility, Applying Prices Based On Cost: The utility also allows you to calculate retail, wholesale and trade-selling prices based on cost. To adjust prices for a category or class select cost price from the drop down menu. Enter the markup percentage (excluding tax) or dollar value into each price field, select the category and / or class and click on the adjust button.
|
Example 1.0
Price Point Changes: Standard, Trade, Wholesale Amount: .50 Standard, .40 Trade, .30 Wholesale Increase / Decrease: Increase Changes based on: Standard – Current value / Trade and wholesale on standard price Applied to: Parts, spark plugs / Bosch spark plugs
|
|
|
|
Price Point Changes: Standard, Trade, Wholesale Amount: $5.00 Standard, $4.00 Trade, $3.00 Wholesale Increase / Decrease: Decrease Changes based on: Standard, Trade and wholesale Applied to: All services
|
|
|
|
Example 3.0
Price Point Changes: Standard, Trade, Wholesale Amount: 10% Standard, 8% Trade, 4% Wholesale Increase / Decrease: Decrease Changes based on: Standard – Current value, Trade and wholesale – Standard Price Applied to: Parts – Category Ignition parts / Contact sets
|
|
Example 4.0
Price Point Changes: Standard, Trade, Wholesale Amount: 40% Standard, 35% Wholesale, 20% Trade Increase / Decrease: Increase Changes based on: Cost price of items assigned to the batteries category. Applied to: Batteries
|
Price Points, Viewing: Price points can be viewed from the part or service form, it is also possible to edit individual parts or services from these displays.
Rebuilt Parts
Overview: Auto Easy allows the user to rebuild an item from current inventory or as a buy-in, the rebuilt item is then held in stock for sale in the same way as inventory. Labour can be added to the rebuilt item, the cost of the item is the total value of labour (at retail rate) plus the cost of the items. Gross profit on these items is calculated by subtracting the cost (parts & labour) from the sell price. Rebuilt items will be displayed in the inventory valuation report in the same way as normal inventory. Parts and labour used to create a rebuilt item can be copied to a new form if required.
Rebuilt Parts, Creating: To create a rebuilt part select the parts listing, from the bottom of the display select new (Insert) from the type field drop down menu select rebuild
Fig 7.11 Selecting Rebuild From The Type Menu
The format of the part form will now change to allow for the addition of labour and inventory items
Fig 7.12 Rebuild Labour & Parts
To add labour point and click in the quantity field and change the value, you can also edit the hourly charge by clicking in the cost field and overtyping the standard rate displayed. It is also possible to allocate the charged labour to a single or multiple technicians by selecting the labour option located under the rebuild labour & parts section of the part form.
Select the add option to add inventory items to the rebuild. Note: Only inventory items can be added to a rebuild, if you are buying parts in specifically for a rebuild item purchase them as inventory then add them to the rebuild.
Rebuilds can be held open the same as charge and vehicle invoices, access to open rebuilds is available from both the diary (in week view) and the sales screen. You can also open a rebuild job from the parts listing by pointing and clicking on the line item.
Sales Screen Diary Display
The quantity of parts added to rebuilds are recorded in the allocation column of the parts listing, when a rebuild item is completed it must be closed using the close option located above the labour and parts grid of the part form. When a rebuild job is closed the inventory items are subtracted from the stock on hand.
The cost of a rebuilt item is determined by the cost of the inventory items and labour value added to the part. The rebuild item can be priced in the same way as inventory items, the gross profit on an item is calculated by subtracting the cost from the retail / wholesale or trade sell excluding GST. To close a rebuild select the close option from the rebuild form.
Rebuilds, Re-Opening and deleting: Rebuilt parts that require editing can be re-opened the same as job cards, to reopen a rebuilt job item go to the part form click on re-open, confirm your action by selecting yes from the warning message. Edit the form as required then re-close by selecting the close option.
Open Rebuild Job Closed Rebuild Job
To delete a rebuild the job must be reopened, highlight the item from the parts listing; select the delete option at the bottom of the list.
To view rebuilds in the parts listing point and click on the rebuild option at the bottom of the list
Rebuilds, Copying Parts & Labour: To copy a rebuild “kit” from a previous job perform the following:
1) Open a new rebuild item
2) Select the copy option from the bottom menu bar
3) From the list of rebuilds highlight the item you wish to copy from
4) Select the OK (F12) button from the bottom of the parts listing
5) The parts and labour from the highlighted item have been copied to the new rebuild
Use the copy option to copy parts and labour between rebuilds
Reports, Inventory Accessing: Select Reports / Inventory from the top menu bar, available reports include:
Inventory Valuation Summary
Inventory Stock Status
Reorder Report
Price List
Reports, Inventory Valuation Summary: This report displays stock on hand by category, if you wish to show all categories select all, to select a single or multiple categories choose selective. Selective allows you to tick the categories required; all will print all categories. The information contained in this report gives you a detailed view of stock on hand with sub totals for each category choice and a grand total of all columns.
Reports, Inventory Stock Status: Allows you to view quantities of stock on hand plus minimum stocks, quantities required for jobs and items on order. The last supplier is also displayed in the preferred supplier column.
Reorder Report: Provides a list of items by supplier that are below minimum, suggesting quantities that bring levels back up to maximum.
Price List: Prints a price list of parts by category including Tax if applicable.
Barcode Labels, Printing Received Inventory: Auto Easy allows the operator to print labels relating to goods received by date range. To print labels the system must first be registered for barcode scanning. Receive items as normal, when processing of goods inwards is complete open the reports module and select the Barcode print out option, select received inventory, select date range and OK to display the received inventory display. The Items will be flagged for printing indicated by a tick in the right hand selection box. It is also possible to re-select items for printing by selecting the box to the right of the printed column. Selecting OK will activate the printer.
It is also possible to select the row you wish printing to commence from the barcode printout options form. The codes can be used to enter parts directly onto the job card; numbers from 1 – 9 are printed on the bottom of each page allowing the operator to also scan the quantity provided. |
Overview: Auto Easy allows you to check the stock of a single item on hand at other nominated sites (Remote Group) directly from the local parts listing. For this feature to work both local and remote machines must be connected to the internet (Broadband Preferred). All sites in the group must have performed a replication to the Genesis server, and finally the option must be selected in settings / Configuration.
Set-Up
1. 1. Ensure your site is set-up with a unique identifier – Genesis personnel will perform this for you on installation, you can check your site id. In File / Settings.
|
|
2. 2. Go to File / Settings / Online and select the online tab, tick the enable replication for this database option, next select the enable replication for this machine – manual – daily – 7,00am.
Note: The replication process can be disabled once you have replicated, you will need to leave this set to true if you are transferring data for your organization or for CRM purposes |
|
3. 4. 3. To set-up the sites you wish to communicate with select add from the remote group section of the form. Enter the unique site id, finally ensure that one of the machines (if you are on a network) has the listen for requests option selected. The machine MUST have access to the internet. If you wish to remove a location highlight the site id. And click on remove. |
|
5. 6. 4. Save the new settings with OK (F12) |
|
Performing A Parts Inquiry
Parts inquires are performed from the parts listing, select the item you wish to run an inquiry for and mouse click on the inquiry button located at the bottom of the parts listing.
Fig 7.18 Selecting The Inquiry Function
Your site will now communicate via your internet connection with the other sites in your group and display the stock available. If a site in the group is not connected to the internet the status field will display an off line message.
Fig 7.19 Part Inquiry Form |
The results of your query will be returned within 5 – 10 seconds (depending on the speed of your internet connection) If you are querying multiple locations the quantities on hand will be listed for each site. To cancel the task select done from the bottom of the part inquiry form. |
Purchasing, Overview: Auto Easy gives you the ability to manage your purchasing functions efficiently from raising a purchase order to delivery and finally supplier payment. The purchasing system is designed to allow for the receiving of parts into inventory or directly to a specific job card. From the purchasing module you can also allocated expenses to your chart of accounts. Auto Easy provides you with a flexible system that allows for the conversion of an invoice to a credit note or even back into a purchase order with one mouse click.
Parts can be distributed to multiple jobs from a single invoice; you can even raise purchase orders directly from an open job card. When you need to process payment you have the flexibility of deducting funds from your trading account, credit card or even funds that you have not yet deposited. Supplier invoices can be processed by due date or invoice date, the choice is yours.
Auto Easy has made what can be a confusing process easy to understand by providing you with a logical easy to follow practices to manage the important task of purchasing and creditor control.
Suppliers, Overview: Before you can purchase items or allocate expenses you need to enter a supplier, suppliers can be parts suppliers such as or service provider which would include your accountant or electricity company etc. Auto Easy allows you to create sub supplier accounts; this feature is extremely helpful if you are dealing with multiple suppliers through one buying group which you pay with one transaction.
To access
the supplier listings select this icon from the top menu bar
Suppliers, Accessing: To open the supplier listing click on the supplier icon at the top of the screen. The supplier listing will automatically display when performing buying functions either from the purchasing screen or job card. To select a supplier when the list enter the supplier code into the search field, or alternatively change the search field by clicking on either the supplier, address, phone or fax field. The header text displays in blue indicating a new search field has been selected.
Fig 8.01 Supplier Listing
Suppliers, Viewing Details: You can view the supplier form by highlighting the record you wish to access point and double click or alternatively select edit from the supplier menu bar. If you wish to display hidden records point and click in the show hidden field, only previously hidden records are displayed in this mode.
Suppliers, Creating A New Record: From the supplier menu bar select new, a blank supplier form is displayed complete the following fields:
Fig 8.02 Supplier Form Fig 8.03 Selecting A “Parent” Account
Supplier: Type the full name of the supplier
Code: Is automatically entered, based on the first 4 alphas or numerics of the supplier name – This can however be overwritten to a code of your choice
Parent: Allows you to select a master account
Suppliers, Creating A Sub-Account: the parent field needs to be selected, highlight the “parent” account from the drop down menu and click. The entry is now inserted into the “parent” field indicating the current record is a sub-account.
Category: Allows you to assign a supplier specific category: ie: Parts Supplier, Holden Parts etc.
Account: Enter the supplier account number into this field
Contact: The salesperson who you normally contact
ABN: Enter the supplier ABN
Phone, Fax, Phone 2 & Orders: Enter contact numbers
Website: Suppliers web site address
Email: Supplier’s email address
Terms: Use the drop down menu to select the payment terms
Hidden: Select if you wish to hide an existing record from the supplier display
Address: Two line address field
Suburb: Enter the suburb and press enter – The state and postcode are automatically inserted
To save your entries select OK (F12).
History: Select this option if you wish to view the purchase history for a specific supplier.
Contractor Types: Auto Easy provides you with the ability to enter and search by a contractor type, this is an extra field displayed in the supplier listing.
Bank Details Comments Tab: Allows you to record the bank details of a supplier for ABA file exports, included is a text area where you can enter notes relating to the supplier, when text is entered a note it icon is displayed at the end of the line in the supplier listing clicking on the icon will display text entered in the field.
Contractor Type, Searching: To search by contractor type point and click on the title of the field which will now display in blue. Enter the contractor type into the search field. If you wish to search for more than one contractor of a particular type point and click on the double arrow button to the right of the search field each record matching your entry will be selected from the supplier listing.
Fig 8.04 Contractor Field |
Fig 8.05 Entering A Contractor Type |
Contractor Type, Entering: The contractor type can is selected from the drop down list accessed from the contractor type field displayed on the supplier form (authorised sites only). Select the down arrow button to the right of the field, type the first letter or scroll down to the type required point and double click and the entry is retained. Select OK (F12) from the bottom of the supplier form to save.
Supplier Billing Address: A billing address can be entered by selecting the billing address tab from the supplier form. The default is the set the same as the physical address. If you wish to enter an alternate, point and deselect the option from the billing address tab and complete the details in the field provided.
Selecting this icon from the
top menu bar will open the purchasing module
Purchasing, Functions: The purchasing module allows you to view a list of Bills, Credits or purchase orders. The module is set to open displaying a bills list, to change the display select from the transaction type options:
The screen also displays totals of each list giving you a transaction total, amount paid and an outstanding balance.
Totals allow you view a summary
of all transactions.
Transactions are able to be filtered by supplier including sub accounts and date range (bill date or due date); you can also search for a specific invoice number.
Note: When choosing to filter by supplier or invoice number you must select the tick box above each selection.
Fig 8.06 Purchasing Display
Purchasing, Selecting Transaction Types: Three types of transactions can be created, viewed or edited from the purchasing screen. To select click on the option required at the top of form under transactions to display
Point and click on the option
required.
Purchasing, Filtering By Date Range: Use the drop down menu top select an alternative period or alternatively free type into the from / to date fields or select the buttons to the right of each date field to select from a calendar. Transactions can also be filtered by due date, this feature can be extremely helpful when determining expenditure for a specified period.
Purchasing, Filtering By Supplier: Select the button to the right hand side of the supplier field, your supplier listing is displayed. Highlight the supplier you wish to select confirm with OK (F12) only transactions relating to the chosen supplier will be displayed. If you wish to display transaction for sub accounts select the tick box located above the supplier search field.
Purchasing, Filtering By Invoice Number: Enter the transaction number into the invoice field, tick the box placed above the field and only the required transaction will be in view.
Purchasing, Viewing Transaction Details: Point at the transaction you wish to view and double click or alternatively highlight the transaction and select edit from the bottom of the display.
Purchasing, Creating New Transactions: Select New from the bottom menu bar, depending on which transaction type is selected a blank bill, credit or purchase order will be in view.
Purchasing, Deleting: It is possible to delete transactions from purchasing, however items that have been allocated to closed job cards have to be deleted from the job card by re-opening.
Purchase Orders
Purchase Orders, Overview: You use a purchase order to communicate with a supplier when you want to order their goods or services.
When you use purchase orders to buy inventory items, Auto Easy keeps track of the items you've ordered. At any time, you can see what is on order. When you receive items, check them against the purchase order. Auto Easy allows you to convert the purchase order into a bill, if the ordered quantity was not delivered Auto Easy will hold the remainder on back order, automatically updating the purchase order. Purchase orders are created from either the purchasing screen or job card. On receipt of goods the purchase order can be converted to an invoice. An additional feature of Auto Easy is the ability to distribute parts out to multiple jobs when items ordered from job cards are received though the purchasing module.
Purchase Orders, Accessing: To view outstanding purchase orders select the purchasing icon from the top of the screen select the orders button from the top of the screen to display any outstanding orders. The date default is month to date, if you wish to display purchase orders created during another period select from the drop down menu or enter the from / to dates into the fields provided.
Fig 8.07 Selecting Orders From The Purchasing Screen
To view the details of a purchase order, highlight the record and double click alternatively select edit from the bottom menu bar. This action will open the purchase order displaying the components of the order. If the purchase order contains items ordered for a job you can select the job card button displayed in the lower menu bar to view the job.
Fig 8.08 Purchase Order Display
The purchase order displays supplier, date, order number and items on order including a financial summary based on the previous cost.
Fig 8.09 Viewing A Purchase Order
Purchase Orders, Creating: Select purchase orders from the transactions to view then select new, alternatively purchase orders can be created by selecting Activities / Create Purchase Order. Perform the following:
Inventory Items
1) Select the supplier you are issuing the purchase order to
2) Overtype the purchase order number if you wish to customise
3) Select add inventory from the bottom of the purchase order form
4) Select the inventory items you wish to order – if you select a catalogue item you will be requested to convert to inventory – confirm with yes, complete selection with OK (F12)
5) Point to the quantity field and edit accordingly for each item
6) Save with OK (F12)
Expenses
1) Select the supplier you are issuing the purchase order to
2) Overtype the purchase order number if you wish to customise
3) Select add Expense from the bottom of the purchase order form
4) From the select expenses list tick the item / items required or create a new expense, complete selection with OK (F12)
5) Point to the quantity field and edit accordingly for each item
6) Save with OK (F12)
Fig 8.10 Select Expenses List
Purchase Orders, Creating From The Job Card: Purchase orders can be raised directly from an open job card. Items are listed as an order in the type field, to close a job you must first receive any items that you have on order.
1) Select an open job card
2) Highlight the service ordered parts are going to be allocated to
3) Select buy in from the selection row under the parts and labour window
4) Select the supplier from the list
5) Point the purchase order selection at the top of the form and click
On selection the Form will display
Purchase Order in the lower left hand corner.
6) Overtype the order number if required (enter will automatically open the buy-in listing)
7) Select Buy-In from the bottom of the purchase order form
8) From the select a buy-in listing click on the item you wish to order (or create a new item by selecting new from the bottom menu bar). Confirm selection with OK (F12)
9) Edit the quantity field from the purchase order form
10) Save by selecting OK (F12)
11) The item is now listed on the job card displaying order in the type field
Purchase Orders, Editing: Select purchasing / purchase orders, highlight the purchase order you wish to edit, double click or select edit from the bottom menu bar of the purchasing screen. An open purchase order allows you to add or remove items and adjust quantities. It is also possible to change the cost price by double clicking on a line item in the purchase order and editing the cost field. To save changes select OK (F12).
Purchase Orders, Printing: Select the print option from the bottom of the purchase order, you will be prompted to include or exclude the previous costs. To include select yes, selecting no will exclude the costs. |
|
Purchase Orders, Emailing: You can email purchase orders to the supplier by selecting the email option at the bottom of the order form. A confirmation message is displayed when the email is successfully dispatched.
Purchase Orders, Deleting: Items on order can be removed either from the purchase order listing or an open job card
Purchase Orders, Receiving Parts: Parts are received by selecting the Purchasing icon from the top menu bar, point and click on Purchase Orders and perform the following:
1) Point and click on the purchase order you wish to process
2) Edit the PO to list items as displayed on the supplier invoice
3) Point to the Bill selection at the top of form and click - a selection message is displayed
Purchase Order Conversion Selection
4) Select either convert or copy
5) Enter the invoice number (This will vary from the PO number)
6) The form is now converted to a bill
7) Select OK (F12) to save
Convert To Bill: Converts all items on the order to a bill deleting the purchase order.
Copy To A New Bill: Creates a bill without deleting the purchase order.
Cancel: Cancels the conversion
Fig 8.11 Bill Form
If you wish to allocate a purchase to a job, point the checkbox in the line item, select the open job and service you wish to assign the part to. The same procedure applies to buy-ins.
Sort: on selection will sort the parts by part number
Previous & Next: Will scroll you through previous invoices or allow you to create a new invoice for the same supplier
Stock, Re-ordering Items Below Minimum Quantity: Auto Easy allows you to create a stock order for items that are below minimum quantity. The order can be filtered by category and supplier, if a supplier is selected only items below minimum that were previously purchased from the supplier will populate the new stock order, selecting categories allows you to be select the type of parts you wish to order from the chosen supplier.
To initiate the stock order
select the stock button from the bottom of the purchasing screen
|
Select from the criteria options whether you wish to raise the order by supplier, categories or all. Selecting categories will display a list, to include a category in the order point and click in the check box at the end of the line on completing your selection select OK (F12). The supplier option allows you to select multiple suppliers and raise an order to a new single supplier. The all selection will display all items that are below minimum levels including a suggested order quantity. If you have recently setup your inventory it is suggested you use the all option as you may not have any purchase history by supplier | |
|
Use the check boxes at the end of the line to exclude an item from the order. Pointing and clicking will clear the check box. Note you can’t change quantities to order from this screen these adjustments need to be performed from the order form. |
|
|
|
|
Selecting OK (F12) from the bottom of the stock listing will open a new order form with the option to select a supplier, highlight the supplier you wish to purchase from, select OK (F12) from the bottom of the supplier listing. Make the necessary adjustment to quantities from the order form and save by selecting OK (F12). The purchase order can be converted to bill in the normal way once the stock arrives.
Receiving Inventory, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to receive inventory and enter the supplier bill in one integrated operation automatically updating your accounts payable account (creditors). Catalogue items can easily be converted to inventory during processing. Quantity and value on hand is updated as invoices are entered, it is also easy to edit a received invoice if adjustments are required after posting.
Receiving Inventory, Processing: To receive inventory open the purchasing module by either selecting Activities / Enter Bill – Receive Items or select purchasing and new from the bottom menu bar of the display and perform the following:
1) Select a supplier from the listing
2) Enter the invoice number (or reference)
3) Select Add Inventory from the bottom of the bill form
4) Select items received from the parts listing (convert catalogue items to inventory) – OK (F12)
5) Edit quantity and values (note: All financial fields can be edited)
6) Check tax codes (click in the tax field and select from the drop down menu to change)
7) Ensure the bill total equals the supplier invoice total
8) Process by selecting OK (F12)
Receiving Inventory, Converting Catalogue Items To Inventory: Occasionally you may list an item as a catalogue part (non-inventory) and decide to carry stock Auto Easy allows you to convert a catalogue part to an inventory item as you enter the items received, Simply tick a catalogue part and you will be prompted to convert to inventory to complete the process select Yes from the message box.
Receiving Inventory, Editing A Bill: Auto Easy allows you to edit a bill from the purchasing module. Select a bill from the purchasing screen, edit the quantity or financial fields as required and save with OK (F12). If payment has been allocated to the bill you will need to edit accordingly from the bill payment screen, unallocated payments are indicated by a red cross against the transaction.
Fig 8.12 Profit Check Form
Receiving Inventory, Profit Check: When entering inventory Auto Easy checks current against previous cost and prompts to increase selling prices according the previous profit margins set for retail, trade and wholesale. If you wish to adjust the selling price according to the percentage increase or decrease point and click in the appropriate check box at the end of each line item. Alternatively highlight a record select edit or double click to open the part form, make the necessary changes and save with OK. Do not tick the check box if you change prices manually.
Receiving Inventory, Deleting A Bill: You can select a bill from the purchasing screen click on the delete button located at the bottom of the display. Confirm your action by selecting the yes option from the warning message. Note: If payments have been received you will need to adjust these accordingly from the bill payment screen. You are not allowed to delete a bill with a reconciled payment allocated; adjustments in this case will have to be performed via a journal entry.
Receiving Job Parts, Overview: Auto Easy has a unique buy-in feature available from the job card allowing for entry of items purchased for a particular job to be entered directly onto the job form. The buy-in features also allows for easy reference of purchase details from either an open or closed job. You have the option to select previous parts allocated to other jobs, saving time when allocating specific items.
Receiving Job Parts, Processing: Go to an open job card and perform the following:
1) Highlight the service you are going to allocate the buy-in part to
2) Select buy-in from the row of options located below the parts & labour window
3) Highlight a supplier from the list – select OK (F12)
4) Enter the supplier invoice number – Press enter
5) Select an item from the buy-in list or add a new item by selecting new
6) Confirm selection with OK (F12)
7) Edit the line item if required
8) Select Ok (F12) to save
Receiving Job Parts, Creating A New Item: To add a new buy-in to the list select new from the bottom of the buy-in list and complete the following fields displayed on the Part Form / Buy-in:
Fig 8.13 Part Form / Buy-in |
Selecting new from the menu bar of the select buy-in listing opens the part form in buy-in mode. Complete the fields and save OK (F12) the new item is automatically entered into the list and flagged for insertion to the job card.
|
Part: Description of the item
Part No: Manufacturers reference
Type: Auto select – Buy-in
Category: Use the button to the right and select from the category list
Income Account: Default account
COGS Account: Default Account
SKU: Stock Reference
Class: Stock Grouping
Sub-Contract: Select if item is sub-contracted, the job summary report will display a total value for sub-contracted work sold.
Cost: Inc or Ex
Price: Enter or select the calculator option
RRP: recommended price
Tax: Default tax codes to change make a selection from the list
Included: Cost & Price includes or excludes tax
Buy-ins, Viewing History: To view the purchasing history of an item allocated to a job go an open or closed job card. Point and double mouse click on the item you wish to view, from the part / buy-in form select the purchasing or sales tab.
Fig 8.14 Viewing Purchase History From The Part Form
Purchasing history for an individual item can be accessed from the part form be selecting the purchasing tab
Buy-Ins, Removing From The Job Card: To delete a buy-in from a job card highlight the entry and select the remove button – confirm your choice in the message box by selecting yes.
Parts, Allocating To A Job From A Bill: Auto Easy allows you to allocate parts from directly from the bill to a selected open job. Items that can be allocated include buy-ins and inventory. To allocate a part to a job, bring the part onto the bill in the normal way by selecting the inventory or buy-in option (if you wish to attach to a job) Inventory items selected will be added to the job however there will be no link between the bill and the item added to the job card from purchasing.
Point and click in the job column adjacent to the part you wish to add, a drop down menu allows you to select the job you wish to allocate the part to, point and click on the appropriate job number, the record is added to the line item. Next move across to the service field again clicking in the cell will allow you to allocate the part to a service that is listed on the job card.
Note: When allocating a part to a job through purchasing you must select a service allocation to finalise the transaction.
You must select a service allocation to complete the transaction from the bill
Supplier Credits, Overview: Supplier credit notes can be created from either the purchasing module or job card. Supplier credits are listed as debit entries in the payment form, allowing you to reconcile your supplier statement and process payment accurately.
Supplier Credits, Inventory Credits: Open the credit form by selecting Activities / Supplier Credit or from Purchasing / Credits / New and perform the following:
1) Select the supplier
2) Enter the credit note number – if this is pending enter TBA
3) Select Add Inventory from the bottom of the form
4) Select the item or items you wish to add to the credit – confirm selections with OK (F12)
5) Adjust the quantity and financials to equal the supplier credit note
6) Save OK (F12)
Alternatively a bill can be selected and converted or copied to a credit note
1) Select the bill you wish to convert from the bill listing, open by double clicking
2) Select credit from the radio buttons at the top of screen
3) From the options selection choose convert or copy
Fig 8.15 Converting A Bill To A Credit |
Convert To Credit: Converts all items on the bill to a credit deleting the original bill. Copy To A New Credit: Creates a credit without deleting the original bill. Cancel: Cancels the conversion
|
4) Edit line items on the credit if required
5) Save OK (F12)
Note: If you do not want to create a credit for all items on the bill copy to a credit note and delete the items that are not being returned for credit. You can also adjust the quantity by pointing and clicking in the quantity field of the line item.
Buy-ins, Creating Credits: Credits can be raised from the job card; options include raising a credit, deleting the item from your records or placing the buy-in into inventory. Perform the following:
1) Open a job card (you are unable to delete buy-ins from closed job cards)
2) Highlight the buy-in you wish to remove
3) Select remove from selections under the parts and labour window
4) Select remove from original bill, place into inventory or raise a credit
Fig 8.16 Options For Removing A Buy-In From The Job Card |
Remove: Completely erases the item from the original bill Place Into Inventory: Converts a buy-in to an inventory item Raise A Credit: Creates a credit Note Cancel: Cancels the options
|
Supplier Credits, Viewing: Supplier credits can be viewed from the Purchasing / Credits screen. The date range for the list automatically defaults to month to date, it is possible to select another period from the drop menu or enter the from / to dates in the appropriate fields. You also have the option to sort by supplier and invoice number. View the details of a credit note by highlighting from the list and selecting edit or pointing at the transaction and double clicking.
Supplier Credits, Editing: Select the required entry from the Purchasing / Credits list. To edit the details of a credit note highlight from the list and select edit or point at the transaction and double click. Make the required changes and save with OK (F12).
Supplier Credits, Deleting: Highlight the required entry from the Purchasing / Credits list and select delete from the bottom of the display accept the delete action. Note: It is not possible to delete a credit not that is contained within payment reconciliation; adjustments will have to be made via a journal entry.
Credits, Creating Notes: Auto Easy allows you to add notes to a line item that forms part of a bill, credit note or purchase order. To add a note point and click in the field identified with …located between the description and type fields. A text field is displayed type your comments and save using OK (F12). The text will be printed under the line item on your credit note, if you wish to view text comments click on the note it icon displayed.
Credits, Emailing: You can email credits to the supplier by selecting the email option at the bottom of the credit form. A confirmation message is displayed when the email is successfully dispatched.
Expense & Other Purchases, Overview: Expenses include the costs you incur to operate your business, these can include items such as phone and electricity, accountant’s fees, travel and vehicle expenses. Fixed assets are capital items that are usually depreciated over a period of time. In Auto Easy expenses, fixed assets and other purchases (excluding stock or job parts) are entered through the purchasing module and allocated to the required expense or fixed asset account.
Expense & Other Purchases, Entering: To enter a new item open the purchasing module by either selecting Activities / Enter Bill – Receive Items or select purchasing and new from the bottom menu bar of the display and perform the following:
1) Select the supplier
2) Enter the invoice or reference number
3) Select Add other from the bottom left hand side of the display
4) From the select expenses list. Flag the item or items required, alternatively add a new item
Fig 8.17 Selecting An Expense Or Other Item
5) Confirm your selection with OK (F12)
6) Edit details from the bill form as required
7) Save with OK (F12)
Note: It is possible to edit the value of any expense entered onto the bill form by pointing and clicking in the appropriate field.
Fig 8.18 Item Form |
Purchases, Adding To Listing: Select new from the buttons at the bottom of the select expenses display complete the following fields:
|
Description: ie: Fuel, accounting fees, rent and stationery
Type: Default – Other
Expense Account: Select the button to view the chart of accounts, highlight the required account or
create a new expense account.
Hidden: Select if you wish to remove the expense from the listing
Cost: Inc / Ex tax
Tax: Default account displayed, select the button to choose an alternative
Included: Inc / Ex tax
Purchases, Viewing Item History: Select the history tab from the item form to view the transaction history.
Purchases, Viewing: Expense and fixed asset purchases can be viewed from the Purchasing screen. The date range for the list automatically defaults to month to date, it is possible to select another period from the drop menu or enter the from / to dates in the appropriate fields. You also have the option to sort by supplier and invoice number. View the details of an expense by highlighting from the list and selecting edit or pointing at the transaction and double clicking.
Purchases, Editing: Select the required entry from the Purchasing list. To edit the details of an expense purchases highlight from the list and select edit or point at the transaction and double click. Make the required changes and save with OK (F12).
Purchases, Deleting: Highlight the required entry from the Purchasing / bills list and select delete from the bottom of the display accept the delete action.
Note: It is not possible to delete an expense purchase that is contained within payment reconciliations; adjustments will have to be made via a journal entry.
Purchases, Crediting: To create an expense purchase credit follow the same steps as supplier Inventory credits, creating.
Creditors, Overview: A major component of successful financial management is keeping track of your creditors (money you owe). Auto Easy allows you to process payment directly from the purchasing module or through the bill payments option. When payment is processed you have the flexibility of nominating which account the funds are to be deducted from. Once a bill has been processed it is easy to track payments from purchasing, bill payments or general ledger. Auto Easy handles tax and superannuation payments differently to normal supplier invoices. Essentially you can display a summary of amounts owing for any period and process payment to include any tax payable account.
Creditors, Viewing Bills: There are two ways to view outstanding supplier invoices, the purchasing screen and by selecting Activities / Pay Bills from the top of the screen.
Purchasing Screen – The screen displays invoices for the all suppliers in the current month it is possible to filter transactions by date range, supplier, due date, outstanding and invoice.
v Date Range: The screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date. It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
v Supplier: Select the button to the right hand side of the supplier field, your supplier listing is displayed. Highlight the supplier you wish to select confirm with OK (F12) only transactions relating to the chosen supplier will be displayed. If you wish to display transaction for sub accounts select the tick box located above the supplier search field.
v Due Date: This function is used in conjunction with the date range, select the period or enter to / from dates, select due date; only invoices that are due for payment are displayed. From the top of the screen select the due date checkbox, invoices that are due for payment in that date range are displayed. Further filtering is possible by selecting view by supplier.
v Outstanding: Selecting outstanding displays only invoices with outstanding balances, transactions include invoices that are part paid.
v Invoice Number: Enter the transaction number into the invoice field; tick the box placed above
the field and only the required transaction will be in view.
Activities / Pay Bills – Displays all outstanding bills for an individual supplier giving you the opportunity to process payment. To select a supplier click on the button to the right of the supplier field, from the supplier listings highlight the required record and confirm with OK (F12). Filters include the ability to display outstanding invoices by date range including due date.
Supplier, Viewing Sub Accounts: It is possible to include invoices allocated to sub-accounts, select the include sub accounts option under the supplier field. Invoice received or due in the date range for each supplier sub account is now in view.
Creditors, Viewing Bill Details: From the purchasing screen point at the transaction you wish to view and double click or alternatively highlight the transaction and select edit from the bottom of the display. Note: It is not possible to view invoice details from the bill payment form
Bill Payment, Overview: Bill payments are processed through the bill payments form. The Form can be accessed from the purchasing module, bill payments or the activities menu. When you pay a bill the accounts payable account balance is reduced by the same value as your payment account. Auto Easy gives you the ability to pay bills from any bank or asset account (ie: Undeposited funds).
Bill Payment, Purchasing Module: To pay a bill from the purchasing module highlight the transaction and select the payment button at the bottom of the screen.
Selecting payments opens the
bill payment form
The bill payment form opens displaying just the invoice that was highlighted with the outstanding amount automatically entered into the amount field. To process payment for a single account complete the details in the details section of the form
Fig 8.19 Bill Payment Form Fig 8.20 Bill Payment Details
Bill Payments, Form Layout: The bill payment form is split into these areas:
Supplier Details: Supplier, Payment Terms, Current Balance
Bill Payment Details: Amount, Date, Media, Account, Record
Bills To Show: Period, Date Selection & Due Date
Bills To Pay: Invoice Date, Due Date, Value, Paid Balance & Current Payment
Find Reference: To locate an outstanding bill by invoice number type into this field and click on the double arrow option to the right.
Select All: When processing multiple bills select all allows you to flag all invoices displayed for payment.
Clear: Clears all selections
Print: Prints a remittance advice
Previous & Next : The previous and next options at the bottom of the form to locate previous entries, if you wish to create more that one bill payment using the next option will open a blank transaction form.
To select the media use the drop down menu, highlight the required type double click and it is displayed in the media field. If you select cheque your trading account and next cheque number is automatically entered into the account and record field. You also have the option of selecting a bank or fixed asset account such as undeposited funds to make a payment from. To view available accounts select the button to the right of the account field.
After completing the details select OK (F12) to process the payment for the original invoice selected from the purchasing screen
Bill Payments, Purchasing Selecting Multiple Bills: Selecting payment from the purchasing module only displays the highlighted invoice, it is however possible to display all invoices owing and flag for payment by selecting all from the bills to show menu. As you select the outstanding invoice the value in the amount field will increase, unflagging a value will decrease the amount you are paying.
Bill Payments, Editing Existing Bills: If you wish to edit an existing bill from the bill payments form, point and double click on the line item, the original bill is now in view, change the value in the bill form and select OK (F12). Auto Easy will return you to the bill payment form, the previous bills selected for payment will remain flagged.
Bill Payments, Adding Bills: As you reconcile your supplier statement you may find that bills have not been posted, if this is the case select the bill option at the bottom of the bill payment form, this action will open a new bill for the supplier. Enter the details in the normal way and save with OK, you will be returned to the bill payment form with all selected items still flagged for payment.
Bill Payments, Activities Menu: to open the bill payments form from the activities menu select the pay bill option. At the bill payment form select the button to the right hand side of the supplier field, highlight the supplier you are processing payments for, confirm your selection with OK (F12) the supplier name is now displayed in the supplier field then perform the following:
1) If you want to display all outstanding invoices by date (not due date) point click on due date
2) Select the invoices you wish to pay – Select All to flag all invoices displayed
3) Enter the payment media from the drop down menu
4) Select the account
5) Enter a record number (sequential based on your last entry is displayed)
6) Process payment by selecting OK (F12)
Remittance Advice, Printing: If you wish to enclose a remittance advice with your payment select the print button located on the lower menu bar of the form. The layout of this report allows you to insert into a window faced DL envelope.
Remittance Advice, Emailing: To email a remittance advice firstly ensure there is an email address recorded in the supplier form, select the bills and payment media, point and click on the email option, confirm your selection and the form is emailed. You can check when a remittance was emailed by selecting the email option which displays a green tick, you also have the ability to resend from this message screen.
|
|
Fig 8.21 Supplier Remittance Advice
Bill Payments, Quick Pay Method: You can process payment for a single bill from the bill form by selecting the payments button from the lower menu bar of the screen, this option will save the bill and open the bill payment form with the supplier invoice ticked for payment in one action. The operator enters the payment method and account clicks OK (F12) and the bill is recorded in purchasing as paid.
To quick pay select payment
from the bill form.
Bill Payments, Processing: You also have the option to process a bill payment directly from the bill payments screen.
|
To access the bill payments select the accounts icon from the top of screen, click on the bill payments option to view the display. Select new from the bottom of the bill payments screen. The bill payment form is now in view; select the supplier and process invoices as required. Confirm the transaction with OK (F12) from the bill payment form.
|
Bill Payments, Viewing: It is possible to view payments from purchasing and the bill payments module. To view a payment from the purchasing module highlight a paid invoice, select payment from the bottom of the screen, details of the payment are now in view. Viewing payments from the bill payments screen requires you to point and double click on the transaction or highlighting the payment, selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the screen, details of the payment are displayed in the bill payment form. You can also filter transactions by type to view supplier or payroll liability payments, click on the arrow to the right of the types field, point and double click on your selection.
Fig 8.22 Bill Payments Display
Bill Payments, Allocating Payment: A green tick is displayed in the allocated column of the bill payments screen indicating the payment has been allocated in full. If a payment is not allocated correctly a red cross is displayed. It is possible to view unallocated payments only by selecting the unallocated option at the top of the screen. You will need to select a new period if you wish to view transactions pre the current month. An unallocated payment may exist due to a paid invoice being deleted from the system or overpayment has been processed leaving unallocated credits on the suppliers account. It is possible to edit a payment to correct the allocation only if the payment does not form part of a reconciled transaction.
Bill Payments, Editing: Open the bill payment form from either the purchasing or bill payments display. It is now possible to select or de-select payment allocating by clicking in the selection field aligned to the transaction, you can also alter the payment amount and account posting from bill payments section of the form. To save your changes select OK (F12).
Fig 8.23 Selecting / Deselecting Payment Allocations
Bill Payments, Selecting Date: The bill payments screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date. It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
Bill Payments, Deleting: Payments can be deleted from the bill payments form by highlighting the record you wish to remove and selecting delete from the bottom of the screen, confirm the deletion from the warning message. When a payment is deleted from the system paid invoices are reversed to outstanding. The supplier total amount due will increase by the amount you deleted. It is not possible to delete a payment if it forms part of a reconciled transaction.
Bill Payments, Processing Credits: Credits are displayed in the bills to pay section of the bill payment form with the amount id brackets ie: ($89.60) when selected the amount owing displayed in the bill payment details will decrease.
Bill Payments, Paying From Undeposited Funds: When processing payment it is possible to pay from undeposited funds, the transaction is listed as a negative amount in the receipts display ie: ($110.00). Indicating this money which would normally be cash is missing from your Undeposited funds.
Bill Payments, Unallocated Payments: Auto Easy allows you to delete paid or unpaid bills providing the payment does not form part of a reconciled transaction. If payments are allocated to a bill selecting delete displays a message box warning that payments have been processed. Continuing will leave the amounts unallocated, unallocated payments will also be created when paying a supplier in advance. When opening the bill payment form if unallocated credits exist for the supplier you will notice a payment button with a red cross.
Selecting
this button from the payment form allows you to view unallocated payments
for the supplier from the bill payments screen. To process an unallocated
payment highlight the line item and double click or select edit (F2) from
the bottom of the bill payments screen.
Fig 8.24 Unallocated Payments Are Indicated By A Red Cross From The Bill Payments Screen
The bill payment form will open, select the date range you wish to display and allocate the payment to invoices by clicking in the box at the end of the line item, save your allocations with OK (F12).
Recurring Transactions - Purchasing
Overview: Auto Easy allows the user to identify a supplier bill as a recurring transaction, it is possible to then store the record and batch run the transactions when payment date is due. This feature allows you to record the payment frequency and next payment date.
Recurring Transactions, Adding: To add a recurring transaction, open a new bill add the item in the normal way, before closing the bill point and click on the recurring transaction option located in the top left hand side of the header, a tick is displayed, point and click on the button to the right of the frequency field, make a selection from the drop down menu. Move across to the next field select the button to the right, from the calendar point and double click on the next payment date, your choice will display in the field. Save or pay the bill in the normal way.
Fig 8.25 Recurring Transaction Set-up
Recurring Transactions, Processing: To process recurring transactions, select Activities / Recurring Transactions, from the recurring bills screen point and select the transactions you wish to create, complete the process by select OK (F12).
Fig 8.26 Recurring Bills Display
The bills are posted to your purchasing screen dated the next rec. date, the list will automatically refresh to display the next payment date.
Recurring Transactions, Editing & Deleting: To edit or delete a transaction select the appropriate option from the bottom of the recurring bills display.
On-Line Payments: Auto Easy can generate an aba file for export to your bank to process single or multiple payments to your suppliers. If you wish to use this feature open file / settings / accounts and complete your bank details including your UID (Unique identity) this can be obtained from your bank.
|
Before processing on-line payments you must complete your trading account details by selecting settings from the file menu and clicking on the accounts tab. |
To create an aba file perform the following:
1) Go to bill payments via Accounts / bill payments, open the bill payment form for your chosen supplier, select the bills you wish to pay, select from the payment media on-line and the account you want the payment to be deducted from (usually your trading account)
|
Finalise payment by selecting OK (F12) return to the bill payments list you will notice on the right hand side of the transaction list you have the ability to select a payment for export, the transaction can be easily identified by the payment media recorded, remember you can use the view option at the top of screen to display on-line payment transactions only. Before moving to the next step ensure you have the suppliers bank details recorded on the supplier form. |
2) From the bill payments list point and click in the check box at the end of the line item you wish to export, select export from the bottom of the display, you are presented with the option to select the destination folder (choose a location that is easy for you to access when exporting to your bank ie: C:\ABA)
|
Confirmation your aba file has been created and saved
Auto Easy will overwrite the previous file if the same name and location are chosen, you can re-select exported records to create a new aba export however be sure you do not duplicate payment exports to your bank. A green tick is displayed in the exported column when a payment has been added to an aba file, it is advisable to take note of this as you process an export. |
Capricorn Statement Reconciliation
Capricorn Reconciliation, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate has an automated reconciliation feature for operators that have a trading relationship with the Capricorn Society. To access this feature you need to firstly attach suppliers to the master Capricorn account, enter all purchases from Capricorn suppliers, download your statement from the Capricorn web site and finally run the reconciliation feature.
Capricorn Reconciliation, Supplier Setup: All Capricorn suppliers need to be setup as sub accounts of Capricorn, plus you must enter the supplier code onto the supplier form as the reconciliation feature uses this field to match purchases. To setup a Capricorn supplier perform the following:
|
1) Select suppliers from the screen icons or pick list option 2) From the bottom of the supplier listing select new 3) Enter the supplier name, select the arrow to the right of the parent field 4) Select Capricorn from the drop down list 5) Complete the details on the supplier form 6) Enter the Capricorn supplier reference number 7) Complete by selecting OK (F12). |
Note: You are unable to save a Capricorn sub supplier form without the unique supplier number.
Fig 8.27 Capricorn Supplier Form
The Capricorn # and supplier id must be entered onto the supplier form for the reconciliation process to function correctly.
Capricorn, Reconciling Purchases: For the reconciliation feature to function correctly you must enter your purchases including the supplier and invoice number. Processes you need to follow are:
1) Download your Capricorn statement from the web site – You can connect to www.capricorn.com.au directly from the On-Line menu functions
2) Save the file, we suggest you create a Capricorn directory on your local machine
3) Select the Capricorn Reconciliation feature from the On-Line menu
4) “Initialising Capricorn Reconciliation” message box and an open Capricorn Export File selection box are now in view
5) Point and double click on the file named intmemb.csv, the reconciliation process will initialise
6) A status box indicates progress
7) When complete the Capricorn reconciliation is in view
8) Most items should be ticked for payment. Others may have red crosses and comments in the notes field
9) Correct the non-matching items & re-run the reconciliation by selecting the re-do option from the bottom of the screen
10) When all items reconcile select payment from the bottom menu bar, from the payment form select the payment media and confirm with OK (F12)
Capricorn, Reconciliation Display: The reconciliation screen will display all matched items with a green tick in the match column. This indicates that the items are flagged for payment, the other items that have a red cross in the match column refer to invoices that have not been found, values do not match or the invoice dates do not match. You have a “drill down” option to correct values or dates, pointing at the line item and double clicking will open the original purchase entry for editing.
Fig 8.28 Capricorn Reconciliation Display
Capricorn, Correcting Purchases: Auto Easy Ultimate allows you to access and correct bills from the reconciliation screen providing a match has been made between supplier and invoice number. To open the original purchase point and double click on the line item, your original bill is in view, change the date or invoice value and save. Repeat this process for other bills displaying a discrepancy then rerun the report by selecting redo from the bottom of the reconciliation screen.
Capricorn, Processing Payment: Select payment from the bottom of the reconciliation screen, all line items displaying a green tick in the match column are flagged for payment. To process select the media type, enter a payment or cheque number and complete the transaction by selecting OK (F12).
Fig 8.29 Finalising A Capricorn Payment |
From the bill payment form you can deselect items for payment if required. Selecting clear will deselect all items, clicking on a flagged line item deselects the single payment. The total payment is displayed in the amount and allocated field at the bottom of the screen |
Overview: Auto Easy has a unique cost centre tracking feature. The option allows an organisation to assign purchases to a specified cost centre including details of the authorised user. The purchase transaction history will display the totals assigned to each account and cost centre by supplier invoice. The report can be exported in Excel format for import into various accounting or administration applications.
Cost Centre Tracking, Setup: Cost centre tracking is not a standard program default hence the option needs to be initialised from the settings screen. Once this is done two new fields are displayed on the bill and credit form Cost Centre and Authorised user, the settings defaults are automatically entered however these can be changed according to the entry requirements.
To setup cost centre tracking perform the following:
1) Open program settings – File / Settings – Click on the configuration tab, select manage users
|
To access a list of authorised users you must first enter the details into the manage users list. It is not essential to establish security, however there is an option that allows admin to set permissions for users to be able to authorise purchase transactions. If this is not set it is assumed that all users have authority to process purchases. |
2) When you have completed entering your authorised users click on the program options tab, tick
track cost centre
|
To select a default cost centre click on the button to the right of the field, a list is displayed; highlight the required record and select OK (F12), the title is entered in the default cost centre field. To create a new record select new from the bottom of the list. |
|
|
Fig 8.30 Selecting A Cost Centre
Fig 8.31 Entering A New Cost Centre |
A new account is setup on the cost centre details form. Type the name of the cost centre followed by the cost centre number (a value MUST be entered in the Centre No. field as this is printed on the purchase transaction summary report. Save your entry with OK (F12). |
3) To save your changes in settings select OK (F12) from the bottom of the settings display, cost
centre tracking is now activated.
It is important that you apply account numbers to the posting accounts in your chart of accounts as these are recorded in the purchase transaction summary report.
Fig 8.32 Chart Of Accounts Displaying Account Number & Tax Code
To add new accounts or account numbers and tax codes please refer to the setting up your accounts section of this manual.
Cost Centre Tracking, Processing A Bill or Credit: Bills and credits are processed in the normal way, except when cost tracking is set two new fields are displayed on the bill or credit screen. It is mandatory for these to be completed otherwise the transaction will not proceed. The data displayed in the authorised user and cost centre field is accessed from the records entered in the program default settings.
Fig 8.33 Bill Form Header With Cost Centre Tracking Set To True
If you wish to change the cost centre and / or authorised person select the button to the right of the field, from the list highlight the record you wish to display and complete with OK (F12).
Purchase Transaction Summary Report: The purchase transaction report can be run by all or selected suppliers (single or multiple) information includes the invoice, account posting and cost centre details.
Fig 8.34 The Transaction Summary Report
To display, print or export this report perform the following:
Display: Select reports from the top of the screen point and click on purchase reports, select the transaction summary report from the sub menu. Choose whether you wish to display all suppliers or selected, to select suppliers from the list point and click in the checkbox at the end of the line
Fig 8.35 Selecting Supplier Transactions To Display
If selecting suppliers confirm your choices with OK (F12). Next you need to enter the date range or period you wish to report on. Select OK and the report will display.
Print:
To print the report select
the print icon located on the top left hand side of the report display
Export:
To report the report select
the export icon located on the top left hand side of the display
Select from the list the export type required ie: Excel, nominate the folder you wish this to be saved to, select OK, name the report and select save.
Tax, Payments Overview: Auto Easy allows you to setup multiple tax accounts, when you create tax accounts as sub-accounts of tax payable you are able to process payment by selecting the total owing according to a “cut off” date. For instance you may wish to process payment of GST for the last quarter in January, in this instance you need to select December 31st. as you up to date. The chart of accounts lists three default tax accounts, GST, PAYG Instalments and PAYG Withholding. Auto Easy processes tax payments differently to other current liability accounts by only displaying a total when allocating payment. Details of tax owing can be viewed from other areas of the program.
Tax, Default Accounts: The chart of accounts has three default accounts displayed as sub accounts of tax payable, it is possible to process payment for these accounts through the pay tax liability feature.
Fig 8.34 Default Tax Accounts
GST: Liability or credit calculated on sales and purchases on an accrual basis excluding income from work in progress, GST rate is entered in settings.
PAYG Installments: Based on the value entered in the program settings multiplied by the turnover (excluding tax) for the payment period.
PAYG Withholding: Tax deducted from wages or salaries paid for the selected period.
Tax, Processing Payment: Before processing a tax payment ensure the total value of the sub-accounts are correct, for instance you may wish to create another account such as disallowed vehicle expenses. Before processing you may wish to make a journal entry to this account, ensuring the amount you are paying is correct. Depending on the level of reporting required you may find it easier to simply set up another sub-account titled tax adjustment and make an entry into the notes field when processing journals to keep track of the various entries.
Fig 8.37 Super / Tax Payment Form |
From the Tax payment form select the button to the right of the supplier field, highlight the payee from the supplier listing ie: Australian Taxation Office and confirm with OK (F12). Next select the show balances as of date by clicking on the button to the right of the date field select your “cut off” date from the calendar. Click on select all. The total amount is entered in the amount field, select the payment media, account and edit the record if required. Confirm the tax payment by selecting OK (F12).
|
Tax, Paying Cash Or Accrual: Values displayed on the super / tax payable form automatically default to accrual. If you wish to pay your GST and PAYG installments on a cash basis select the cash option located above the accounts window. Data will instantly change to reflect amounts owed based on actual payments and receipts for the selected date range ie: Last payment date to the date entered in the show balances as of. Note: You must decide whether to process payment on a cash or accrual basis, if you try to change your accounting method a box will prompt whether you wish to continue. It is possible to accept a change however you need to be aware of the implications of swapping from cash to accrual or visa versa. It is suggested you seek direction from your financial adviser on which method is the most effective for your business.
Fig 8.38 Selecting The Payment Criteria From The Pay Tax Feature
Tax, Editing Payments: Open bill payments from the accounts icon, highlight the record you wish to edit open the tax payment form by double clicking on the transaction or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. It is now possible to select or de-select payment allocations by clicking in the selection field aligned to the transaction, you can also alter the payment amount and account posting from the accounts section of the form. To save your changes select OK (F12).
Tax, Deleting Payments: Payments can be deleted from the bill payments display by highlighting the record you wish to remove and selecting delete from the bottom of the screen, confirm the deletion at the warning message. When a payment is deleted tax payments are reversed. It is not possible to delete a payment if it forms part of a reconciled transaction.
Tax, Viewing Tax Payments: Go to the bill payments screen, select the entity you pay tax to from the supplier list by selecting the button to the right of the supplier field and click the view by supplier option. Next select the period or enter the date range for the transaction you wish to view. To view the details of a transaction double click on the transaction or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display.
Tax, Locking Transactions: Auto Easy allows you to lock transactions to a specified date, it is suggested that once you have completed your BAS and made payment (process the last day of the reconciled period this will display all values as zero) that you lock transactions to the last date of the tax period. To set the locking date, go into File/Settings/Configuration, tick the enable lock checkbox, and next select a date from the calendar by clicking on the button to the right of the date field. You can disable or change the date at anytime, save your settings with OK (F12).
General Ledger, Overview: The general ledger is the core of your company’s financial records. These constitute the central “books” of your system, and every transaction flows through the general ledger. These records remain as a permanent track of the history of all financial transactions since day one of the life of your company.
Auto Easy’s accounting system has a number of subsidiary ledgers (called sub-ledgers) for items such as cash, accounts receivable, and accounts payable. All the entries that are entered (called posted) to these sub-ledgers will transact through the general ledger account. For example, when a credit sale posted in the account receivable sub-ledger turns into cash due to a payment, the transaction will be posted to the general ledger and the two (cash and accounts receivable) sub-ledgers as well.
There are times when items will go directly to the general ledger without any sub-ledger posting. These are primarily capital financial transactions that have no operational sub-ledgers. These may include items such as capital contributions, loan proceeds, loan repayments (principal), and proceeds from sale of assets. These items will be linked to your balance sheet but not to your profit and loss statement.
Setting Up: There are two issues you need to be aware of when setting up the general ledger. One is their linkage to your financial reports, and the other is the establishment of opening balances.
The two primary financial documents of any company are their balance sheet and the profit and loss statement, and both of these are drawn directly from the company’s general ledger. The order of how the numerical balances appear is determined by the chart of accounts, but all entries that are entered will appear. The general ledger accrues the balances that make up the line items on these reports, and the changes are reflected in the profit and loss statement as well.
The opening balances that are established on your general ledgers may not always be zero as you might assume. On the asset side, you will have all tangible assets (the value of all machinery, equipment, and inventory) that are available as well as any cash that has been invested as working capital. On the liability side, you will have any bank (or stockholder) loans that were used, as well as trade credit or lease payments that you may have secured in order to start the company. You will also increase your stockholder equity in the amount you have invested, but not loaned to, the business.
Creating An Audit Trail: Don’t let the word audit strike fear in your heart. I am not talking about a tax audit. If you are called to respond to an outside audit for any reason, a well-maintained general ledger is essential.
But you will also want an internal trail of transactions so that you can trace any discrepancy (such as double billing or an unrecorded payment) through your own system. You must be able to find the origin of any transaction in order to verify its accuracy, and the general ledger is where you do this in Auto Easy.
General Ledger, Accessing: To view the general ledger select accounts icon from the top of screen, point and click on general ledger to view transactions
Selecting general ledger will
allow you to view transactions
The general ledger screen displays all transactions in detail including the debit / credit account posting.
Fig 9.01 General Ledger Transaction Display
Fields include:
Transactions To Show: Period or date range and transaction type
Transactions: Details include
Date: Transaction date
Type: Includes: All types, Invoices, Receipts, Bills, Bill Payments,
Supplier credits, Deposits, Payroll, Journal entries, transfers, Credit
memos.
Reference: Invoice number or reference
Account: Chart of accounts posting
Debit: Displays accounts receiving a debit entry
Credit: Displays accounts receiving a credit entry
View By Account: Allows you to select an account from the chart of accounts
View Reference: Ability to enter an invoice, bill or reference number
Show Amount: Search for by transaction value
Functions include:
Edit: Allows the operator to view transaction details and edit entries that have not been reconciled
Delete: Ability to delete transactions that have not been reconciled
Entry: Opens the journal form
Done: Exits you from the screen
General Ledger, Selecting Transactions To View: Firstly select period or date range, the screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date. It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require.
|
|
You can also select the - from to dates- by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form |
Fig 9.02 Selecting Periods And Specifying A Date Range
Next select the type of transaction you wish to view, the default is all, and selecting the button to the right of the type field displays a drop down menu of transaction types. Highlight your choice and double click only transactions of that type are displayed for the period or date range selected. In the example below the type selected are bills and the period is month to date.
Fig 9.03 Displaying Bills Only For The Month To Date
General Ledger, Totalisations: The debit and credit columns are totalised toward the bottom of the display. The debit and credit value must always be the same, totalisations relate to the transactions selected.
General Ledger, Viewing Transaction Details: It is possible to view transaction details from the general ledger. To view the original transaction details highlight an entry, point and double click on the transaction or highlight the line item and select edit (F2) from the bottom of the screen, details of the transaction are displayed in he original format they were created.
General Ledger, Editing Transactions: Transactions need to be edited from the original form, for instance if you view a closed invoice from the general ledger screen the invoice will require re-opening to change the financials.
General Ledger, Deleting Entries: You have the ability to delete an un-reconciled transaction from the general ledger. If you choose to delete transactions this way all postings are reversed. To delete a transaction highlight the record you wish to remove and select delete from the bottom of the screen, confirm the deletion at the warning message.
Note: Only transactions that have not been reconciled can be deleted.
General Journal Entries
General Journals, Overview: The General Journal is the most basic of journals. It is a chronological list of transactions. It has a very specific format for recording each transaction. Each transaction is recorded separately and consists of: date; all accounts to receive a debit entry are listed first with an amount in the appropriate column, then all accounts to receive a credit entry are indented and listed next with an amount in the appropriate column.
General Ledger, Creating Journal Entries: To create a new journal transaction select the Entry button from the bottom of the general ledger display or select activities / journal entries from the top menu bar. Either of these actions will display the journal form.
Fig 9.04 Journal Form |
To enter transaction details select the button to the right of the first entry in the account field column. You will see a list of accounts, select the account you wish to debit or credit to, double mouse click the account name is entered into the account field. Next point at either the debit or credit fields, enter the value. ie: Trading account enter a credit of say $20.11 (according to the principles of double entry accounting a credit to your bank account will be logged as a debit in your chart of accounts).Point at the field below the last account entry and mouse click, from the account list select the account you wish to make a debit entry to, we will select bank charges enter $20.11 into the debit column. The transactions now balance and the unallocated amount is zero.
Journal Entries, Using Tax Codes: You may need to allocate an amount to tax when processing certain journals. An example would be when adjusting a clients account to write off a bad debt, say the amount to be written off was $110.00 you would credit the clients account with $110.00 and split the opposing debit entry between an expense account ($100.00) and GST ($10.00).
|
To apply tax to a journal select the tax code field click on the down arrow, next point and click on the required tax code, the tax amount is automatically calculated and placed into the tax amount field. Tax is calculated on the value of the debit or credit entry entered on the same line.
Journal Entries, Adjusting Debtor And Creditor Accounts: Auto Easy allows you to adjust individual accounts assigned to accounts receivable (Debtors) and accounts payable (Creditors) with a journal entry. The entries are recorded in the bill payments (creditors) and Receive Payments (Debtors) forms, payments and receipts can be allocated to these transactions in the same way as process bills and invoices.
To adjust a debtors account select the button to the right of the account field, from the chart of accounts select accounts receivable, the name field can now be accessed, point and click on the button to the right of the field, from the client list select the client you wish to raise the adjustment for, select OK from the bottom of the client listing. The clients name is now displayed in the form.
If you wish to increase the balance of a debtors account place the value (in tax) into the debit column on the same line as the client’s name. Next select the account you wish to post to if there is a tax value enter the excluding tax amount to the debit column on the same line, to enter the tax value select the tax code and the calculated value is automatically entered in the tax amount field. Note: That the tax and debit or credit value can be changed, however the total credits must always be equal to the total debits for the transaction to be posted.
Journal entries are displayed in the following format on the bill payment and receive payment forms
Receipts (Debtors)
Bill Payments (Creditors)
Ticking the box at the end of the line allows the operator to allocate payments or receipts to a journal.
General Ledger, Journal Entries Editing: To edit a journal go to the general ledger by selecting the accounts / general ledger option from the top menu bar. Search for the entry you require, highlight and double click on the line item or select edit from the lower menu bar. You can now alter any of the details except the reference number.
General Ledger, Journal Entries Displaying: To view journal entries only from the general ledger display select the arrow to the right of the field at the top of screen displaying All Types – select journals from the drop down list. To filter journal entries by date select the field at the top of the screen-displaying month to date. Select the arrow to the right of the text. Next highlight the period you wish to view or alternatively type the from to dates into the date fields also located at the top of the form – selecting the arrows on the right hand side allows you to pick from a calendar. Pointing and double clicking on an entry displays the details.
General Ledger, Accounts Overview: A chart of accounts is a list of the categories of financial transactions for a particular business. These categories are grouped as:
1) Asset Accounts - things of value owned by the business.
2) Liability Accounts - amounts owed to outsiders.
3) Owner's Equity Accounts - amounts owed by the business to its owners (profit). If the business loses money the owners may owe additional money to the business.
4) Revenue Accounts - Sources of income.
5) Expense Accounts - Payments necessary to run the business.
Proper accounting practice requires a double entry accounting system. This means that each value input into the system is a credit (-) to one general ledger account and a debit (+) to another. Since each entry affects two accounts by the same amount, debiting one and crediting another, the accounts are always in balance. Another way to look at accounting is to view the chart of accounts as a row of jars lined up along a wall with a label on each jar. The first jar might be labeled "Bank Account". One further down the line might be labeled "Phone Expenses". If a phone bill is paid the accounting system takes an amount of money out of the "Bank Account" jar and puts it into the "Phone Expenses" jar. Thus it can be seen that the sum of the credits will always be equal to the sum of the debits meaning the books will be in balance or the sum of the debits and credits together will be zero.
One might wonder where the money comes from to be transferred between jars. The point is that the jars (or accounts) start out empty and they stay empty to the extent that the sum of the money in the jars is always zero. A credit to one account is offset by a debit to another so that we have +1-1=0.
Auto Easy Accounts are set up in this way
Asset accounts carry a debit balance (+)
Liability accounts and owner's equity accounts carry a credit balance (-)
Revenue accounts carry a credit balance (-)
Expense accounts carry a debit balance (+)
Credits = Debits
Assets = (liabilities + owner's equity)
Owner's equity = Capital input + profit
Profit = Revenues + expenses (revenues are negative and expenses are positive)
Assets + liabilities + capital input + revenues + expenses = Zero
General ledger, Viewing Transactions By Account: To view the transactions associated with a general ledger account select either the account filter from the general ledger transaction display or select lists / chart of accounts.
General Ledger: From the bottom of the general ledger screen select the button to the right of the view by account option. The chart of accounts is now in view, highlight the account and confirm with OK (F12) point and click on the check box above the field. Only transactions relating to the selected account are in view. You will need to select a period or date range if you wish to view transactions pre month to date.
Chart Of Accounts: From the chart of accounts list point and double click on the account you wish to view or alternatively highlight select edit (F2) from the bottom of the list. The account details form is displayed.
To view transaction details
select the ledger button at the bottom of the form. The general ledger
screen is opened displaying related posting for the month to date if you
wish to view transactions pre current month you need to select a new period
or enter a date range.
Chart Of Accounts, Creating New Accounts: From the bottom of the accounts listing select new, this action opens the account details form enter the name of the account ie: Office equipment, next you have the opportunity to enter the opening balance.
Fig 9.05 Creating A New General Ledger Account |
General Ledger, Creating Sub Accounts: If you wish to attach an account to a “parent” select the arrow to the right of the sub-account field. A list of accounts is displayed, highlight the account you require and double mouse click. The account will appear in your chart of accounts as a sub account. Ie Depreciation -- Hoist
|
You may want to use sub-accounts for two reasons:
§ You want a further breakdown of amounts for an existing account. To accomplish this, set up sub-accounts of the existing account. From now on, use the sub-accounts instead of the parent account. (You may want to edit earlier transactions so the breakdown shows up on reports covering a period before today.) For example, suppose you have an Insurance expense. You add sub-accounts for building, equipment and personal
§ You already have related accounts that you want to subtotal on reports (Or you may want to find them more easily). You set up a new parent account and then make the related accounts sub-accounts of the new parent.
General Ledger, Viewing Accounts: From the top of screen select Lists / Chart Of Accounts, your general ledger accounts are listed including current balances.
Fig 9.06 Chart Of Accounts
Bank Deposits, Overview: When you receive payments, whether for jobs, invoices, or cash sales, you can either show them as deposited into a bank account, or you can wait until the end of the day or end of the week to deposit the money you've collected. Auto Easy allows you to choose the method you prefer for depositing payments.
When you are deciding on the method to use to deposit payments, think about how your bank statements show deposits. You should select the deposit method in Auto Easy that imitates your bank statements to make it easier for you to reconcile your bank accounts.
For example, if the bank statement shows a lump sum for a deposit, you should group payments with other funds for deposit; if the bank statement shows each individual cheque that was deposited, you should choose to deposit directly to an account.
You can choose an account to deposit payments to from the payments receipts form, if you select a bank account from the drop-down list, Auto Easy automatically records a deposit for the amount of the payment in the account you selected on the date you received the payment.
If you accept the default account - undeposited funds, Auto Easy holds your undeposited funds in a other current asset account called Undeposited Funds until you record a deposit.
Bank Deposits, Viewing Payment Receipts: Select the accounts icon from the top of the screen, from the menu click on receipts. Displayed are individual customer payments, refunds and cash payments made to suppliers from undeposited funds.
Fig 9.10 Viewing The Receipts screen
The account field displays the amount as being allocated to a other current asset account title undeposited funds or an account the amount has been deposited to ie: Trading account. To view details of the payment highlight the record and double click or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. To
Bank Deposits, Filtering Payment Receipts: The receipts screen is set to automatically display transactions for the month to date.
v By Date / Period: It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
v Undeposited Funds: Refers to all receipts that have not yet been deposited to a bank account. To view only undeposited items point and click on the undeposited check box at the top of screen.
v
To reverse your selection
point and click on the tick in the undeposited only
check box.
v Unallocated: Selecting this filter from the top of screen displays only receipts that have not been allocated to invoices. Unallocated amounts are indicated by a red cross in the allocated column instead of a green tick.
Selection
allows you to view all unapplied credits recorded in the receipts screen.
v Client: It is also possible to filter receipts by single client Select the button to the right hand side of the client field, your client listing is displayed. Highlight the client you wish to select confirm with OK (F12) only transactions relating to the chosen client are displayed.
Select the
check box above the client field to view.
Bank Deposits, Processing: It is possible to bank money directly to a bank account from the payment receipt form as you are processing a payment. To change the undeposited funds default account select the button to the right of the account field, a list of bank and other current asset general ledger accounts is in view, highlight the account you wish to deposit the funds to and confirm your selection with OK (F12).
Fig 9.11 Selecting a deposit Account from the Payment Receipt Form
Alternatively a bank deposit for a group of received payments can be created from the receipt screen by clicking on the deposit button from the bottom menu bar or by selecting Banking / Deposits.
Receipts Screen: Select
deposit from the bottom of the display, the deposit form opens listing
all undeposited funds recorded. To process a deposit, payments can be
selected individually or you have the option to flag all by using the
all button located at the bottom of the form.
Click on the all button to flag
all records for deposit, selection is indicated by a tick in the check
box field of the transaction.
Fig 9.12 Deposit Items Viewed From The Deposit Form
Bracketed values indicate credits (money returned to clients and now missing from undeposited funds or supplier payments paid from the undeposited funds account The deposit details display the date, account, selected account current balance and a text memo field.
Fig 9.13 Deposit Form – Deposit Details Fig 9.14 Deposit Summary
Deposit Details: Allows for entry of the date, account plus provides a texts memo field.
Date Selection: Type the date in DD/MM/YY format or select the button to the right of the date field and click on the date from the calendar display.
Trading Account: To change the deposit account select the button to the right of the account field and highlight a record from the list confirm with OK (F12).
Balance: Locked field recording the current balance of the account displayed.
Memo: Is a free typing field
Navigating Transactions: Select the previous and next buttons if you wish to scroll through transactions. If you wish to enter more than one deposit completing the transaction with next will open a blank form.
Deposit Summary: Displays totals of the various media types and a grand total of all media components of the deposit. When negative values ie: ($10.20) is selected from the deposit items window the value of deposit will decrease, therefore allowing you to reconcile the true cash value on hand.
Finalising: To finalise a deposit select OK (F12) from the bottom of the deposit form. You are returned to the receipt screen displaying the deposit account against each transaction processed
Fig 9.15 Settings / Configuration – Banking Fig 9.16 Selecting Deposits
Before printing ensure these details are entered in your site configuration. To print your deposit slip select the receipt print button from the bottom of the form. Your bank details, cheques and other payment media are entered for you allowing you to deposit without manually completing a deposit slip.
Banking / Deposits: Alternatively the deposit form can be accessed by selecting the banking icon at the top of the screen and clicking on deposits. The deposit form opens displaying all undeposited funds, select the items you wish to bank, print the slip and accept with OK (F12).
Bank Deposits, Printing A Deposit Slip: Auto Easy allows you to enter your bank details into the site settings by selecting the configuration tab and completing the banking section of the form.
Deposits, Viewing: To view a list of deposits select the banking icon at the top of the screen and click on deposits. The deposit screen lists all deposits for the current month. You can view the details of a deposit by highlighting the entry and double clicking or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Deposits can be edited from the deposit form displayed; however any changes will affect the current bank balance. Note: It is not possible to alter a reconciled deposit.
Fig 9.17 Deposits
Deposits, Viewing By Date Range: It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
Deposits, Deleting: it is possible to delete a deposit from either the general ledger display or deposit slip. If deleting from the general ledger highlight the transaction and select delete from the bottom of the display. To delete from the deposit form, open the deposit you wish to delete and select the delet button located at the bottom of the form.
Bank Transactions, Viewing: To view bank account transactions select the banking icon from the top of screen, click on transactions from the menu. The banking screen displays all transactions month to date for your trading account.
Fig 9.18 Bank Account Transactions
You can view the details of a transaction by highlighting the entry and double clicking or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Transactions can be edited from the forms displayed; however any changes will effect associated transactions. As an example if you alter a payment allocated to an invoice the outstanding balance of the invoice will change accordingly. Note: It is not possible to alter a reconciled transaction; reconciled items are indicated by a green tick at the end of the line entry.
Bank Transactions, Selecting A Date Range: It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
Bank Transactions, Account Selection: The bank transaction screen allows you to select a bank or credit card account. Click on the button to the right of the account field from the select account list highlight the required entry and confirm your selection with OK (F12). The new account name is displayed in the account field including the current balance and associated transactions for the period selected.
Fig 9.19 Selecting An Account To View From The Bank Transaction Screen
Bank Transactions, Debits & Credits Selection: Auto Easy allows you to view credits and debits for the selected account or credits, or debits only. Select the button to the right of the debits & Credits field click on your selection from the drop down menu.
Bank Transactions, Transferring Funds: You can transfer funds between any two balance sheet accounts. For example, you may need to transfer funds from a savings account to a current account to cover your weekly payroll.
1) From the bottom of the bank transaction screen select Transfer
2) Enter the amount you want to transfer
3) Select a media type from the drop down menu
4) Select an account to transfer funds from, and an account to transfer funds to.
5) Click OK (F12).
Bank Transactions, Editing A Transfer: Highlight the transaction and double click, or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the screen, make the necessary adjustments as required and save your changes with OK (F12).
Note: Only transfers that have not been reconciled or allocated on the bill payment or receipts form can be deleted.
Fig 9.20 Transfer Form |
The funds transfer form allows you to transfer money between accounts and allocate a media type. To make financial adjustments between accounts where you do not want to record a media type use the journal entry function
|
Bank Reconciliation, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to reconcile bank or credit card transactions against your statement. It is important that you structure your payments and deposits as close as possible to your bank statement entries. For instance your bank may clear EFT transactions on a daily basis, to ensure deposits match your bank statement deposit all EFT receipts daily to your bank account. You may have direct debits that are automatically withdrawn from your account, again make sure you enter these as they become due; selecting direct as the payment media will easily identify these entries.
You need to be aware that Auto Easy enforces certain restrictions when editing reconciled transactions. Once a receipt that is part of a reconciled deposit or a bill with an assigned payment which has been reconciled the following rules apply.
Transaction Value: Not able to be changed
Transaction Media: Unable to be altered
Transaction Date: Unable to move to an alternative date
Bank or Credit Card Account: Unable to move to an alternative account
Bill Payments: You can however open a reconciled bill payment and re-assign payments or select an alternative supplier, in this situation all payment allocations to the original supplier invoices will be removed and you will need to re-assign the payment value to invoice or journals outstanding for the new supplier.
Bills: Reconciled bills can be re-opened and items and suppliers changed, however the total value of the invoice must always be the same for the changes to be recorded.
Receipts: It is also possible to open receipts that have been deposited for which the deposit has been reconciled. Allocations can be changed plus you have the option to select a new client and assign the amount received to outstanding invoices on the new account.
When you have completed reconciling the closing balance must equal the equivalent balance on your bank or credit card statement. It is possible to process transactions such as bank charges directly from the reconciliation screen.
To avoid corrupting the integrity of your data you are unable to edit any reconciliation beyond the very last one performed. This feature does give you the opportunity to make changes just in case you committed an incorrect reconciliation.
Bank Reconciliation, Accessing: Bank reconciliation can be started from either the bank transaction screen by selecting the reconcile button at the bottom of the display.
Selecting reconcile from the
bank transaction screen opens the reconcile function.
Alternatively you can go directly to the reconcile function by selecting Activities / Reconcile from the top of the screen. You will need to select an entry from the account list if you open the screen from the activities menu.
Fig 9.21 Reconcile Screen
Bank Reconciliation, Processing: First ensure you are viewing the correct account then perform the following:
1) The opening balance should be the same as the opening balance of your current statement (the closing balance of your last reconciliation).
2) Enter the closing balance of your statement into the closing balance field – the difference field will display the difference between the two values. Bracketed values are negative ie ($45.60).
3) Point and click on the selection field at the end of the line item as you mark off the matching entries on your bank statement. Note: Credits are deposits or money transferred to your account / Negatives relate to payments ie: Cheques and direct debits.
4) Check the difference is zero – finalise with OK (F12)
Bank Reconciliation, Adding Transactions: If you need to enter additional transactions to balance your reconciliation use the credit or debit fields located in the additional transactions section of the screen.
Fig 9.22 Entering Additional Transactions
A value entered in the credit field will increase your closing balance, entering a value into the debit field will decrease your bank balance. Select the button to the right of the field to display your general ledger accounts, highlight your selection and confirm with OK (F12).
Date Editing - Auto Easy allows for editing of the reconciliation date field, once reconciliations are re-ordered the opening balances will re-calculate from the closing balance of the last reconciliation based on date hierarchy.
Bank Reconciliation, Searching Transactions: To search for a specific record enter the reference or value into the search fields located at the bottom of the form, point and click on the button to the right of the field, the cursor will highlight each record that matches your entry. Click on the double arrow to initialise the search function. To display credits or debits only select the arrow to the right of the show field, highlight the required entry and double mouse click.
Bank Reconciliation, Viewing Transaction Details: Highlight the line entry and double click or select edit from the bottom of the display. Transactions can be edited from their respective forms; changes will be entered directly to the current reconciliation.
Bank Reconciliation, Posting Discrepancies: If you complete the reconciliation with the closing balances between your accounts and the bank statement not equaling zero a message will request whether you wish to continue or not. Selecting yes will post the difference to opening balance equity, if you wish to adjust this posting you are required to raise a journal entry.
Bank Reconciliation, Editing & Deleting: You can only edit or delete the most recent reconciliation for each bank or credit card account. To delete a reconciliation highlight the line item from the reconciliations screen, point and click the delete option located on the lower menu bar of the display.
Auto Easy also give you the option to edit the mot recent reconciliation, to change any previously reconciled items, highlight the line entry from the reconciliations display and double click or choose edit from the lower menu bar, the reconciliation will be displayed. Make the changes including your closing balance and save with OK (F12).
Bank Reconciliation, Holding: Auto Easy allows you to “hold” an unfinished reconciliation, select the on hold option from the top right hand corner of the reconciliation screen. Select Ok (F12) to exit, complete the reconciliation by de-selecting the on hold option.
Bank Reconciliation, Select All: To select all transactions select the All option located st the bottom of the reconciliation screen.
Selecting all with select all
outstanding un-reconciled transactions
Credit Cards, Overview: Auto Easy allows you to have multiple credit card accounts. You can pay suppliers from these accounts and reconcile your transactions against a statement. On completing the reconciliation you have an option to process payment from a bank account. The general ledger accounts contain a credit card account type which is listed under other current liabilities in your balance sheet.
Credit Cards, Entering An Opening Balance: You are able to enter an opening balance when creating a new credit card account. Type the amount into the current balance field and confirm your entries with OK (F12). Opening balances are posted to the credit card account and opening balance equity if you wish to transfer the amount from your equity account create a journal entry.
Credit Cards, Viewing Transactions: To view bank account transactions select the banking icon from the top of screen, click on transactions from the menu. The banking screen displays all transactions month to date for your trading account. To select a credit card accounts click on the button to the right of the account field and select from the account list. All transactions for the month to date are displayed, to view other records use the various filters available from the bank transaction display.
Credit Cards, Reconciling: A credit card reconciliation can be started from either the bank transaction screen by selecting the required credit card account then selecting the reconcile button at the bottom of the display. Alternatively you can go directly to the reconcile function by selecting Activities / Reconcile from the top of the screen. You will need to select a credit card account from the list, highlight and confirm with OK (F12) to open the reconcile display.
To complete the reconciliation first ensure you are viewing the correct account then perform the following:
1) The opening balance should be the same as the opening balance of your current statement (the
closing balance of your last reconciliation).
2) Enter the closing balance of your statement into the closing balance field – the difference field will display the difference between the two values. Bracketed values are negative ie ($95.60).
3) Point and click on the selection field at the end of the line item as you mark off the matching entries on your credit card statement. Note: Credits are deposits or money transferred to your account / Negatives relate to payments ie: Cheques and direct debits.
4) Check the difference is zero – finalise with OK (F12)
Credit Cards, Reconciling Adding Transactions: If you need to enter additional transactions to balance your reconciliation use the credit or debit fields located in the additional transactions section of the screen.
Fig 9.25 Entering Additional Credit Card Transactions
A value entered in the credit field will increase your closing balance, entering a value into the debit field will decrease your credit card balance. Select the button to the right of the field to display your general ledger accounts, highlight your selection and confirm with OK (F12).
Credit Cards, Posting Reconciliation Discrepancies: If you complete the credit card reconciliation with the closing balances between your accounts and the bank statement not equaling zero a message will request whether you wish to continue or not. Selecting yes will post the difference to opening balance equity, if you wish to adjust this posting you will need to raise a journal entry.
Credit Card, Processing Payment: To process payment of your company credit card complete the reconciliation on selecting OK (F12) a prompt is displayed if you wish to process payment immediately select yes the transfer form is displayed. From the transfer form select the account you wish to process payment from. Selecting your default bank account will enter the next cheque number and the amount automatically. To complete payment select OK (F12) from the bottom of the transfer form.
Reconciliations, Viewing: To view reconciliations select the banking icon at the top of screen from the drop down menu select reconciliations a list of previous reconciliations is in view. To display the details of reconciliation highlight the line item and double click or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Note: It is not possible to edit reconciliations once you have saved the results.
Reconciliations, Deleting & Editing: It is possible to delete or edit only the last reconciliation saved, all previous entries are unable to be altered. To open a reconciliation highlight the entry at the top of the list point and double click, to delete select delete and accept the action from the warning message displayed.
Payroll, Overview: Payroll is an integrated feature of Auto Easy Ultimate. This comprehensive module allows you to record employee details, default payroll payment and superannuation information for both employer and employee funds. The employee form allows you to select the master account you wish the individual employees wage to be recorded, payments and deductions can also be allocated to specific accounts. The employee record gives you the option to record the annual holiday and sick leave entitlements, Auto Easy will calculate a value for both of these entitlements as a payroll transaction is processed. PAYGW values flow over to your tax reports; superannuation is automatically calculated and posted to a liability account of your choice. Tax is calculated through a direct link to the ATO tax withholding calculator. Payroll provides you with a broad range of reports including transaction detail by type and holiday and sick leave entitlements.
Payroll, Employee Details: To enter the details of a new employee select lists / employees from the top of the screen, select new from the bottom of the employee listing. The employee form is
Fig10.01Employee Listing
tabulated into three sections; Details, Payroll, Banking & Super. Details contain information such as address, date joined, special notes and tax file number. Payroll allows you to record the wage, hourly rate and tax to be paid. Banking and superannuation is a record of the employee’s bank details for direct payments and the employer / employee superannuation fund he / she belongs to including the policy number.
The
details section
contains the following fields:
Last Name: ie: Smith
First Name: ie: Harry
Middle Initial: ie: P
Employee Number: You can assign employee numbers, this can be as simple
as 1,2,3 etc.
TFN (Tax File Number): Enter the employees tax file number
Joined: Select the start date from the drop down calendar
Left: Date employment terminated
Type: Full Time, Part Time. Casual
(printed on the pay advice)
Class: Prints the relevant employment class on the pay advice
D.O.B: Insert the employee’s data of birth
Gender: Select from the drop down list
Technician: Point and click if the employee is not a technician
Daily
Hours: Record
the standard daily hours the employee normally works
Hidden: Click if you wish to hide the record from the employee listing
Phone: Home phone contact
Mobile: Mobile phone number if applicable
Notes: ie: supply uniform, employee will not work after hours etc.
Address: Home address
Suburb: Enter suburb press enter, the state and postcode are automatically
inserted
State/City: Auto or manual entry
Postcode / Province: Free typing field
Fig 10.02 Employee Details
Payroll, Employee Payroll Details: Select the payroll tab from the employee form to enter pay details. This screen is designed to record the standard pay details, displayed are 2 grids one displays payments the other deductions.
Fig 10.03 Employee Payroll Details Fig 10.04 Payment Type
Payroll Payments: To enter the type of payment click on the arrow in the type field, double click on your selection. Note: If you are paying a technician hourly based on hours worked or charged it is not necessary to select a type, enter the hourly rate in the hourly rate for labour allocated field at the bottom of the form. After selecting the payment type point and click in the quantity field if you are paying an employee on a weekly, fortnightly or monthly basis you must enter a value in this field ie: 1 press enter your cursor moves to the rate field enter the hourly, weekly, fortnightly or monthly value press enter the total value is now visible in the total column, press enter to move to the next line.
Payroll, Allowances: There are 3 Allowance options in the drop down list – Tool, Zone and other selecting any of these options as a payment type will display the payment separately on the pay slip and will not be added to the taxable income. Any value allocated to allowances will also be displayed separately on the payroll summary form.
Payroll, Cost Per Hour: If you wish to enter a calculated cost per hour complete the field provided, if you wish to apply this value to the job profit report select from File / Settings / Database Settings the use employee cost per hour for job profit report.
|
If a payment requires the employer to pay superannuation point and click in the super check box |
Superannuation: If a payment attracts an employer superannuation liability, tick the super check box on the payment line. To calculate the superannuation liability place a value in the super@ field located to the right of the payment grid.
|
The employer superannuation liability is calculated and displayed in the super field. Flagging multiple entries as incurring super will change this figure with the calculation based on the total of all flagged payments. |
The total superannuation value is also displayed in blue as the first entry in the deductions grid in the lower section of the form. You will note that as you add deductions to the form the employer superannuation value is NOT added to the total deductions.
Payroll Deductions: Deduction types are selected in the same way as payments, enter the type of deduction click on the arrow in the type field, and double click on your selection. Deductions vary from payments as they give you the option to nominate the account posting. Note: Do not change the posting for income tax this should always be Tax Payable / PAYGW.
To select an account to assign to a deduction type, click on the button to the right of the account field displayed in the deductions grid this will open your chart of accounts giving you access to your liability and other current assets account.
Payroll, Calculating Tax Deductions: Enter the payments, next click on the calculator next to the tax value, the tax deductible amount is entered and deducted from the taxable gross.
Fig. 10.04 Selecting A Posting Account From The Deductions Grid
You can only post to account types Long Term Liabilities, Other Current Liabilities and Other Current Assets. The reason for this restriction is that deductions will either be for amounts your have to pay in the future (liabilities) or amounts that have already been paid (assets) a couple of examples are:
Loans – Imagine you advance your employee a loan of $100.00 let’s look at how you would record the loan advance and the subsequent payments through payroll.
To advance the loan transfer funds from the bank account or Undeposited funds to a current asset account titled employees loan. The amount is now recorded as $100.00 in the current asset account.
To pay back the loan and deduct the amount from the employee’s wage, select loan repayment as the transaction type; select the button to the right of the account field highlight the loan account select OK. Enter the deduction (loan repayment) in the totals field on processing you will notice the loan account has reduced by the loan repayment value.
Child Maintenance – In this example we will assume that you have to deduct $50.00 a week from your employee which is subsequently paid to the dept. of social services for child maintenance.
Firstly set up a child maintenance account as a sub account of payroll liabilities
Allocating a child maintenance deduction from payroll requires you to select child maintenance from the transaction type list, select the posting account as child maintenance (the liability account you have already setup) enter the value of the payment into the totals field. When processing the payroll transaction you will note that $50.00 has been added to the liability account – Child maintenance.
To pay the child maintenance when advised use the pay other payroll liabilities option from the activities menu, setup the dept as a supplier enter into the supplier field enter the date you are paying to, tick the amount for payment (child maintenance record) and process in the normal way.
Employee Superannuation Contributions: Employee voluntary contributions can be deducted directly from an employee’s wage. It is essential before selecting this option you record the employee fund name, account number and date joined in the banking & super section of the employee form. The employees fund details will be printed on the pay advice only if this information has been completed.
|
To process an employee’s super contribution select this transaction type from the deductions list, enter the total value of the contribution and press enter. The value will be added to the liability account you setup for the posting. Note: Employees superannuation contribution should always be posted to a liability account so payment for multiple values can be made to the fund manger. |
Wages Account: Auto Easy allows you to create and select a specific account for each employee or group, it is suggested that if you wish to record wages in this way you set up a master wages account and add employees or employee group as sub accounts. Using this method you will totalise wage payments on your profit and loss – as an example:
|
To assign a wages account to the employee select the button to the right of the wages field, select the account from the list and save with OK. |
Note: Wages can only be assigned to expense or cost of goods sold account types
Payment Frequency: It is essential that you choose a payment frequency from the drop down list, holiday and sick leave entitlements are calculated from this selection. Nominating a pay period allows you to process payments at any time for a period in the future; Auto Easy will also prevent you from processing multiple transactions in a period for an employee. |
|
Hourly Rate: Only complete this field if you intend to pay a technician based on charged or actual hours worked in a date range. If this is the chosen method of payment do not enter a base payment into the payments grid.
Only enter a value if paying
on an allocated labour basis
Payroll, Tracking leave entitlements: For Auto Easy to calculate holiday and sick leave entitlement it is essential that you select a payment frequency and enter the annual entitlement in the correct fields. Any accrued entitlements also require entering on the payroll form. Based on these values the entitlement is calculated and printed on the pay advice when a payroll transaction is processed.
|
Auto Easy will allow you to calculate entitlement in Days or hour. Enter the annual entitlement into the day / Hours fields per year for sick pay, holidays, rostered days off and long service leave. When recording for the first time enter the accrued value to date into the days / Hours accrued fields. Auto Easy will calculate entitlements as transactions are processed. |
Fig 10.05 Recording Entitlements |
To change the entitlement display to hours or days select the entitlement units option from the employee form. Note: Whichever format you choose to record entitlements must be same when processing payments. |
Payroll, Employee Banking & Super: To enter the banking and superannuation details of an employee click on the Banking / Super tab of the employee form. You can enter bank account details for your reference when paying employees direct and record the employer and employee’s superannuation account details.
Payroll, Salary Sacrifice: If an employee elects to salary sacrifice into a superannuation fund select the salary sacrifice option available from the employee / banking & super form. When this option is selected the contribution is not taxed and the value does not appear on the employee’s payroll summary.
Fig 10.06 Employee Banking & Super Details
It is also possible from this form to select the employer superannuation posting account, the default is an expense account titled Employer Super Contribution. Selecting the button to the right of the account field will give you access to expense and cost of goods sold accounts you can setup a new entry and allocate the cost of superannuation to either account type.
Hourly Rates
Payroll, Hourly Rates Overview: Auto Easy allows you to pay technicians based on either hours charged (invoiced to the customer) or actual hours logged against a jobs for a set period. The hours charged to a customer are automatically calculated when a job is closed, the total value can be split between multiple technicians. You also have the option to record the actual hours worked as these may vary from the hours charged, payroll allows you to then pay a technician for a predetermined period by either hours worked or hours charged. You can also run a productivity report that compares hours worked / charged by job and technician making it simple to track the “true” productivity of each technician.
Payroll,
Setting Labour Rates:
To set labour rates open the employee
form ensure the technician option is set to true in the details section
(default).
Only employees that are set up as technicians will be
displayed in the labour allocation screen displayed when finalising a
job.
Next you need to enter
the hourly rate in the payroll section of the
employee form, this can be for either hours worked
or charged depending on your payment
method. Save with OK (F12).
Note: For this feature to work correctly it is essential you set up the correct labour rates in your services file. You have the option to enter three level of charges standard, wholesale and retail, labour allocated is calculated on the rate applied to the job or invoice.
Fixed
price services calculate the hours charged on this basis:
(Service Charge) – (Parts value) = (Labour Value) /
(Retail Hourly Rate) = (Hours Charged)
Labour Allocation, Overview:
Auto Easy allows you to track hours charged or worked by technician. Entries
are made on the labour allocation form as a job is closed, labour can
be split between multiple technicians on an hourly or dollar value basis.
The labour allocation form also allows for entry of the actual hours worked
by technician. Labour entries can also be made from an open job card by
selecting the labour button.
Labour Allocation, Posting: This task is performed as the job card is closed or by clicking the labour button from an open job card, the labour allocation form displays automatically if auto close has been selected from the settings. If you are not using auto close the labour allocation form needs to be opened by selecting the labour button from the job update display, the labour allocation form allows for the allocation of actual hours charged to a single or multiple technicians. You also have the ability to record the actual hours worked.
If you wish to allocate the total hours to one technician select with the mouse and click on allocate remainder. All the labour has now been allocated to the technician selected. To enter multiple labour allocations select a technician and type in the hours or dollar value select allocate, repeat this procedure for any subsequent technicians using allocate remainder on the final entry. When the task is completed select OK (F12).
Fig 10.07 Labour Allocation Form |
|
|
The table at the top of the form displays the total and allocated hours when total hours are allocated the remainder is zero. To allocate hours to the allocations section click in the charge hours or worth fields, enter the value and enter. To complete the allocation highlight the technician and select allocate remainder the unallocated balance is now applied.
To allocate actual hours worked point and click in the actual hours field and enter the value, to save your entries select OK (F12).
Labour Allocation, Viewing: You may wish to view previously posted labour allocations, this can be displayed from a closed job card by selecting the labour button located to the right under the parts and labour section of the display.
Labour can only be viewed from
closed and open (if allocated) job cards.
Labour Allocation, Editing: Labour allocations can be edited from a closed job card by selecting the labour button; it is possible to reallocate labour as required. If you wish to delete all previous allocations select the clear option from the allocation form. Save your changes with OK (F12).
Labour Allocation, Adding New Technicians: From the top of the screen select lists / employees from the bottom of the display select new, the employee form is now in view complete the details, payroll, banking and super sections. Ensure the technician option is selected and save with OK (F12).
Payroll Transactions
Payroll, Payments Overview: Auto Easy gives you the option to process payroll payments on an hourly, weekly, fortnightly or monthly basis. You can authorise payment from any bank account or undeposited funds, Superannuation is automatically calculated from the percentage rate entered in the employee record. Withholding tax is calculated from the payroll transaction form using the ATO tax calculator; payments of PAYGW are processed from the pay tax option. Payroll has the ability to export a file in the format required to process EFT payments through the National Australia Bank.
Payroll, Accessing: To open the payroll module click on the payroll icon located at the top of the screen.
Click on the payroll item to
process payments
The payroll screen includes a list of payroll payments processed including the ability to filter by employee and date range. You can edit, create new and delete payroll transactions from this screen Note: It is not possible to edit or delete reconciled transactions.
Fig 10.08 Payroll Display
Payroll, Filtering By Employee: To filter by employee from the payroll screen select the button to the right of the employee field, the employee list is in view. Highlight the record you wish to view, confirm with OK (F12) the employee name is now displayed in the field. Point and click on the view by employee selection, only transactions for the selected record are now displayed.
Payroll, Filtering By Date Range: It is possible to select another period by clicking on the button to the right of the month to date field, from the drop down menu point and click on the period you require. You can also select the - from to dates - by either typing into the fields at the top of form in DD/MM/YY format or selecting the button to the right of the - from / to - boxes and double clicking on the date required. Today’s date is highlighted in red, to move between months select the arrows at the top of the calendar form.
Payroll, Filtering By Payment Type: Option to view transactions by payment type
Payroll, Editing Payments: Highlight the transaction from the payroll screen, double click or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the screen, make the changes and save with OK (F12).
Payroll, Exporting Data: Auto Easy has the ability to create an export file in a format required by the National Australia Bank to process wage payments electronically. For this feature to work first process pays in the normal way, next point and click in the check boxes to the right of the records you wish to export.
Click on the export button at
the bottom of the display, from the save in screen select the folder in
which you wish to store the NAB.ABA file, click save to complete the process
a message is displayed confirming the file path, when a record is selected
for export a green tick is displayed in the exported column. Note:
Before passing this file onto your bank, please ensure the format meets
their requirements.
Payroll payments can only be processed from the payroll screen. Select the payroll icon and new from the bottom of the display to view the payroll transaction form.
Fig 10.09 Payroll Transaction Form
Select the employee by clicking on the button to the right of the employee field. If you are paying an employee that is on a fixed wage or salary the details entered in the employee record will automatically be entered in the amount section of the form.
If amounts vary or you wish to add extra payments to the form point and click on the first empty line, from the drop down menu select the payment type, press enter your cursor will move to the quantity field if you are paying a set amount enter 1 press enter and type the value into the rate field press enter twice to move through the total field onto the next spare line.
To process payment by the hour enter hours in the quantity field and the hourly value in the rate field, total payment is automatically calculated and added to the total column. Ensure you flag all items in the payment grid that attract employer superannuation liabilities.
Tax Option: When selected the payment will be taxed if left unchecked then the payment will be excluded from the taxable gross income.
Payroll, Paying Holiday & Leave Entitlements: When processing holiday or leave entitlements it is essential that you choose the correct payment type from the drop down list and enter into the quantity field the amount of days or hours you wish to deduct from the total accrued to date. When paying leave loading the value will automatically be entered based on 17.5% x holiday pay. The value can be edited if required.
|
When processing holiday or sick leave payments you must enter the amount of days you wish to deduct from the total accrued into the quantity field |
Fig. 10.10 Processing Holiday Or Sick Leave Payments
Payroll, Processing By Hourly Rates: To pay a technician by hours worked or charged you first need to have the employee set up as a technician and an hourly rate entered in the payroll section of the employee form. Select the employee from the payroll transaction form. Select whether you wish to pay the employee for the period displayed (automatic entry based on pay frequency and last end of period date) on a by charges or actual hours worked basis. Select insert, the total hours, hourly rate and total value will be displayed in the payments grid.
|
To pay a technician on an hourly basis you must have an hourly rate recorded in the employee form.
|
Note: There are 3 Allowance options in the drop down list – Tool, Zone and other selecting any of these options as a payment type will display the payment separately on the pay slip and will not be added to the taxable income.
Payroll, Multiple Payment Function: Selecting the Auto option from the bottom of the payroll transaction listing initiates an auto-run process for payroll payments. Select Auto from the bottom of the screen a list of employees is displayed, point and click on the check box to the right of the record to include employees you wish to include in the payment run. Select OK, the transactions are processed including pay slip printing.
Fig 10.11 Processing multiple payroll payments |
Payroll Multiple Payments, Notes: The auto feature can only be used if all payments are being paid from the same account ie: payroll clearing, all payments will have the same reference number allocated so if paying by each individual by cheque you will have to edit the transaction to correct the reference, this can easily be performed from the payroll transaction listing. To be effective this feature also requires you to be paying the amount recorded on the employee form; again values can be altered if required after processing by accessing the payroll transaction list. If you wish to select all employees click on the all option at the bottom of the screen. |
Default Wage Payment Account: To record a default wage account open settings from the file menu click on the accounts tab. Select the payment media and account from the drop down menu. Save your settings by exiting via OK or F12
|
Auto Easy provides you with the ability to calculate income tax liabilities plus deduct employee superannuation contributions and allocate other payments to liability or other current asset accounts. Deductions are taken away from the gross payment with the net payment being paid from your nominated account.
Payroll, Calculating Income Tax: When you load Auto Easy you are given the option to install the TWC program if this is loaded you will be able to access the tax calculator directly from the payroll transaction or employee form. To calculate the taxes you are required to withhold select the TWC button to open the calculator. You next need to enter the calculation criteria for your employee, once the entries are complete select the calculate button to display the amount you need to enter into the tax field of the payroll transaction form.
Payroll, Recording Other Deductions: Deduction types are selected in the same way as payments, enter the type of deduction click on the arrow in the type field, and double click on your selection. Deductions vary from payments as they give you the option to nominate the account posting. To select an account to assign to a deduction type, click on the button to the right of the account field displayed in the deductions grid this will open your chart of accounts giving you access to your liability and other current assets account.
Fig. 10.12 Select An Account You Wish The Deduction To Be Posted To.
You can only post to account types Long Term Liabilities, Other Current Liabilities and Other Current Assets. The reason for this restriction is that deductions will either be for amounts your have to pay in the future (liabilities) or amounts that have already been paid (assets)
|
Payroll, Transaction Summary: The payroll transaction summary is displayed to the right of the payments grid. Gross is the total transaction (not including employer superannuation contribution) deduct is the total deductions including income tax. Net represents the actual amount to paid to the employee and deducted from the employer’s nominated account. The super @ field displays the percentage at which superannuation is calculated, this can be changed by pointing and clicking in the field and overtyping the current value. The Super field records the total employer superannuation contribution for the payroll transaction. |
Fig 10.13 Transaction Totals
|
To finalise the transaction you need to nominate the payment type, select button to the right of the media field, selecting cheque will insert your default bank account and the next cheque number. Selecting other media requires you to choose the account that you are processing payment from. To record the transactions select OK (F12). |
Fig 10.14 Payment Details
Overview: Payroll provides the operator with a comprehensive range of reports, including a detailed pay advice and a selection of transaction reports. The pay advice is printed from the payroll transaction form, payroll detail reports can be accessed from the reports menu.
Payroll, Printing A Pay Advice: Complete all the details on the payroll transaction form as previously described, select the print button located on the lower menu bar, your employees pay advice is displayed on screen.
The advice is split into the following sections:
Note: It is essential that you complete the fund details on the employee form for this information to print on the pay advice
Holiday Days / Hours Accrued To calculate holiday days or hours accrued the days / hours per year field in the employee form MUST contain a value. Any used holiday payments must be recorded in the quantity field of the pay transaction in days or hours depending on how you record your employee entitlements.
Reports, Payroll: Transaction reports are accessed fro the reports menu in the payroll group
|
Click on the reports option at the top of screen, move your cursor down to Payroll Reports, the sub menu is displayed. To select a report point and double click on the descriptor. All reports can be filtered by data range and employee. |
Fig 10.15 Accessing Payroll Reports
Payroll Summary: Summarises all payments made in a chosen date range by employee
Payroll Detail: Provides details of each pay transacted in a given period including the method and payment reference.
Payroll Transaction: Displays details of all payment and deduction types for a given period by employee
Holiday, Sick, RDO & LSL Allocations : Displays holiday and leave entitlements for each pay by employee, displaying credits and debits for both entitlement types
Group Certificate, Printing: To print group certificates, select reports PAYG Payment Summaries
Select whether you wish to print certificates for all employees or individuals, next enter the date range and proceed with OK.
PAYG Payment Summary – Report available under payroll reports – PAYG Payment Summary Statement, the report displays a summary of all group certificates for a specified period.
Other Payroll Liability Payments
Overview: All liabilities relating to payroll payments must be setup under payroll liabilities, this way the accounts can be viewed from the pay other payroll liabilities (option from activities) for easy payment processing. Samples of the accounts you would post to payroll liabilities include superannuation, child maintenance deductions and employee voluntary superannuation payments.
One of the main advantages of using the pay other payroll liabilities feature is the ability to view values as of a certain date, as most of the liabilities incurred would be paid on a monthly or quarterly basis it is easier to view and process payment as of a certain date rather than subtracting from the current value.
Superannuation, Payments: The balance of the superannuation account is generated from the gross wages paid over a selected period multiplied by the superannuation percentage of each employee. You will probably pay this liability on a monthly basis, Auto Easy allows you to process payment via a special Pay Superannuation feature which operates in a similar way to the Pay tax function.
Superannuation, Processing Payment: Select Activities / Pay Superannuation from the top of the screen. The superannuation payment form is in view, select the button to the right of the supplier field, highlight the payee from the supplier listing ie: AMP and confirm with OK (F12). Next select the show balances as of date by clicking on the button to the right of the date field select your “cut off” date from the calendar. Click on select all. The total amount is entered in the amount field, select the payment media, account and edit the record if required. Confirm the Superannuation payment by selecting OK (F12). Note: Auto Easy allows you to have one superannuation account which is automatically set up as a sub-account of payroll liabilities; you can however process payments to different superannuation funds. In these examples we are processing a payment to AMP. Our superannuation balance is $1,231.49 as of the 31st. July 2004.
Fig 10.16 Paying Superannuation
In the previous example we process a $550.00 payment to AMP leaving us an outstanding balance of $681.49 to be paid to Mercantile Mutual. Confirm the payment with OK (F12). Select pay superannuation from the activities menu the superannuation form now displays a balance of $681.49 as of the 31st. July 2004. Complete the bill payment details and process payment with OK (F12). Closing balance of your superannuation liability for 31st. July 2004 is now zero.
Superannuation, Editing Payments: Open bill payments from the accounts icon, highlight the record you wish to edit open the superannuation payment form by double clicking on the transaction or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. It is now possible to select or de-select payment allocations by clicking in the selection field aligned to the transaction; you can also alter the payment amount. To save your changes select OK (F12).
Superannuation, Deleting Payments: Payments can be deleted from the bill payments display by highlighting the record you wish to remove and selecting delete from the bottom of the screen, confirm the deletion at the warning message. When a payment is deleted superannuation payments are reversed. It is not possible to delete a payment if it forms part of a reconciled transaction
Superannuation, Viewing Payments: Go to the bill payments screen, select the entity you pay to from the supplier list by selecting the button to the right of the supplier field and click the view by supplier option. Next select the period or enter the date range for the transaction you wish to view. To view the details of a transaction double click on the transaction or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display.
Other Payroll Liability Payments: In this example we will imagine that we have deducted child maintenance payments from an employee’s salary and we have received notification from the Department of Family Affairs to pay last months deductions – The process you would follow is:
1) Select child maintenance as a deduction from the deductions grid of the payroll transaction form, attach this deduction to a payroll liability account title child maintenance payments.
2) To pay the amount owing firstly setup the Dept. Of Family Affairs as a supplier, next open the Activities / Pay Other Payroll Liabilities Screen and select the Dept. Of Family Affairs as the supplier.
3) Tick the show balances as of option, enter the date you wish to pay to and press enter the values will recalculate in the form grid.
4) Tick the value on the Child Maintenance payments line, this amount will be posted to the amount field, next enter the payment media, account and record.
5) Select OK (F12) to process
Fig. 10.17 Paying Other Payroll Liabilities
Any payroll liability can be paid in the same way, it is also possible to tick multiple amounts for payment ie: employer and employee superannuation payments if they are being paid to the same fund manager.
Superannuation Funds, Recording: On the employee form you have the ability to record the superannuation fund both for the employer and employee (they may be different) at the bottom of the payroll / payments form the super fund is displayed for both employer and employee contributions. A superannuation contributions report can be run from reports / payroll which lists all contributions by employee and superannuation fund.
Super Contribution Report
Fleet Management, Overview: The fleet management module allows an operator to manage the service schedules for multiple fleet companies based on the odometer reading. Functionality includes the ability to import service schedules from existing vehicle records. The dedicated management screen allows the fleet operator to update current odometer readings by vehicle and create bookings / open jobs directly from the service schedule display. It is also possible to filter information from the display by vehicle, company or vehicles due for service. This module allows the operator to run a fleet service report. Data can be sorted by odometer range and service status including due, booked, quote, work in progress and completed. Service status can be viewed by single of multiple selections.
Fleet Management, Registration: To access the fleet management module you need a registration code from Genesis Australasia, this is an extra module that is not opened by the standard program code. To enter the code select File / Registration from the top of the screen type the 16 alpha / numeric code into the appropriate fields, if this is done correctly a green tick will replace the red cross at the end of the row save your entry with OK (F12).
Fig 11.01 Fleet Management Registration
Fleet Management, Vehicle Set Up: To set up a fleet vehicle it is important you perform the following:
Open the vehicle listing from and select edit for and existing vehicle or new to set up a new vehicle. Update the current odometer reading; select the servicing tab next select fleet vehicle clicking on the selection located between the service reminder and service schedule buttons displayed on the vehicle form. Selecting this option will allow the operator to access the service schedule option.
Fig 11.02 Selecting The Fleet Vehicle Option From The Vehicle Form
The service schedule button is not accessible until the fleet vehicle check box is ticked
Note – The odometer must be updated before the fleet flag is set to true, if this procedure is followed correctly services due prior to the current odometer reading in existing schedules will be ignored.
Fleet Management, Service Schedules: To access select the service schedule button from the vehicle form, the service schedule form is displayed. It is possible to create a new or import an existing schedule from a fleet vehicle.
New Service Schedules – Select new from the bottom menu bar of the service schedule display, this action opens the services file. Select the services you wish to add to the schedule, if the services do not exist select new from the bottom menu bar of the services list and add a service in the normal way. It is possible to select single or multiple services to add to the service schedule. Confirm your selections with OK (F12) from the select services screen. Next you need to enter the kilometres each service is due at in the service schedule entry form. Confirm your entries with the OK (F12).
Fig 11.03 Adding Multiple Services To A Service Schedule
Fig 11.04 Linking An Odometer Reading To a Service
It is important you enter the kilometers at which the service is due, not the duration between services. If services are due before the current odometer reading they will be ignored.
Service Schedules, Importing - From the bottom menu bar of the service schedule screen select import, this action displays the select a fleet vehicle screen. This listing allows for search functions exactly the same as the standard vehicle listing, for example if you wish to search by vehicle model point and click on the model column header, which will now display in blue. Type into the search field Commodore, the first Commodore on the list is displayed; it is also possible to search the list for other Commodores by selecting the arrow to the right of the search field.
Fig 11.05 Selecting A Schedule For Import
When you have located a vehicle with a service schedule you wish to import highlight the record and select OK. The service schedule to be imported is displayed; save to the original vehicle by selecting OK, if the schedule is incorrect select cancel, you will now be able to search the fleet vehicle listing for an alternative
Fleet Management, Service Schedules Deleting & Editing: It is possible to delete or edit a service in the schedule by opening the vehicle form, selecting service schedule and edit or delete from the lower menu bar of the display.
Deleting – Highlight the record, select delete and confirm your choice from the remove services message box by selecting yes.
Editing – Highlight the record, select edit to display the service schedule entry form, it is possible to change the odometer entry or service. To change the odometer delete the current value and re-enter, select the button to the right of the service field to display the service listing, select the new service and confirm with OK (F12)
Fig 11.06 Viewing A Vehicle Service
Fleet Management Functions
Fleet Management, Function Screen: To access the fleet management screen select Management / Fleet Management from the diary screen this selection will display the main fleet management screen from which you can perform the following:
§ View all fleet vehicles
§ Filtering of fleet vehicles by client, vehicle registration or services due
§ Update odometer readings
§ Addition of new fleet vehicles from the current vehicle listing
§ Ability to remove fleet vehicles
§ Create a booking for vehicles with services due
§ View service history
§ Run a fleet service report based on service status and odometer range
Viewing Fleet Vehicles - The fleet management screen displays the following information:
ü Client / Company = Registered owner of the vehicle, this field is the index for the display
ü Registration = Vehicle registration
ü Make = Make ie: Holden, Ford Mitsubishi
ü Model = Model ie: Commodore, Falcon, Magna
ü Odometer = Free typing field allowing entry of current odometer
ü Last Entered = Last date the odometer was updated
ü Next = Next scheduled service due
ü Odo = Preset odometer reading for the next service
ü Last Service = Last service type
ü Date = Date of last service
ü Odo = Odometer reading when the last service was performed
Records that have the next and Odo fields displayed in red indicate a service is due for example: Kilometres entered 31,203 service is due at 30,000 the record will highlight in red.
Viewing The Vehicle Record - Highlight the record you wish to view and select the vehicle button from the bottom menu bar, it is possible to edit the record or change the vehicle owner at this point. Save the changes by selecting OK from the bottom of the vehicle form.
Fig 11.07 Fleet Management Display
Filtering Records - It is possible to filter displayed records in three ways, selections can be single or multiple
View vehicles by client – Select the button to the right hand side of the field, the client listing is displayed highlight the client and select OK from the bottom menu bar of the client listing. The client name will be displayed in the field, next point and click in the box provided. Only vehicle records that are flagged fleet for the selected client are displayed.
View by registration – Enter the registration number into the field, select the box provided. Only the selected vehicle will be displayed.
Viewing vehicles due for service – Select the box provided; only vehicles due for service are displayed. It is possible to make multiple selections for example selecting a client and services due will only display vehicles with a service due for that fleet.
Updating Odometer Readings - The module allows for easy entry of current odometer readings. Point and click in the odometer field of the record you wish to update, the cursor is now positioned to the right of the current entry, type the new value. Save by pressing enter (this will move the cursor to the next entry in the list) or use the up / down arrow keys.
Note: As entries are made if the vehicle is due for service the record will highlight in red
Adding New Fleet vehicles - It is possible to add new fleet vehicles from this screen by selecting new from the bottom menu bar. The vehicle listing is displayed; highlight the record you wish to add select OK from the vehicle listing. At the service schedule either enter a new schedule by selecting new or select import to attach an existing vehicle schedule to the new fleet vehicle. Select OK to save the displayed schedule.
Removing Fleet Vehicles - Highlight the record you wish removed and select delete from the bottom menu bar, select yes from the warning message. The vehicle now removed from the display.
Note: Only vehicles flagged fleet will be displayed on from the fleet management screen, selecting remove the fleet flag this function does not remove the vehicle from the vehicle database.
Viewing Vehicle History – Highlight the vehicle record and select the history button from the bottom of the display. This action opens the client form with transactions for the selected vehicle displayed, to view details point and double click on a line item.
Bookings
Fleet Management, Creating A Booking: From the fleet management display point and double click on the vehicle record you wish to create a booking for. Select a service / services you wish to include in the booking by pointing and mouse clicking on the line item, a tick is displayed in the box at the end of each row. When selection is complete select booking from the lower menu bar of the display, this will open the booking form. Create the booking in the normal way; selecting OK from the booking form will display the service schedule form. The status of selected jobs will have changed to booked or work in progress if the job card has been created from the booking form.
The fleet management module allows the operator to filter information by the following criteria:
§ Odometer Range
§ Service Status
§ Fleet Vehicles
Reports, Fleet Management: To run the report select report from the bottom menu bar of the fleet management screen from the fleet service reports option display enter the criteria you wish to search by. Selections can be singular or multiple.
Odometer Range – Any reports on all odometer ranges, specific allows for the entry of a from / to value ie: 50,000 – 70,000.
Service Status – The operator can make singular or multiple choices from the selection ie: Due and booked will only display vehicles that are due for service or already have a current booking.
Fig 11.07 Fleet Service Report Options
|
Fleet Services – All selects all fleet vehicles. Selective vehicles allow the operator to select specific vehicles from the fleet vehicle listing. Selective clients open the client listing allowing for singular or multiple selections of clients.
When filtering a report by fleet selection always select the odometer and service status first if applicable.
|
Fig 11.08 Fleet Service Report
Task Manager, Overview: Auto Easy incorporates a powerful and yet user friendly task manager. This module allows the user to set contact and local tasks, appointments and record organisation procedures. Task functions are seamlessly linked to the marketing options within the program ensuring that the operator follows through on any recorded contacts. Tasks and appointments can be viewed on a daily or weekly basis, the status of a task is icon flagged.
It is possible once security has been enabled to set tasks for user groups, individuals or all operators. Once an operator logs on only tasks and appointment relating to that operator will be displayed. When tasks are completed the item is operator, date and time stamped providing administrators with an audit trail of tasks.
Checklists can be created and attached to a task, these can be printed and the individual checks ticked on completion. Notes relating to the task can be made on the task form.
Integrating the task manager to marketing functions allows you to operate your business more efficiently for instance you are able to record a task directly from a marketing search. The item will appear in your task list with an icon displaying the progress to date.
Authorised users have the ability to setup reminders that “pop up” at a predetermined time ie: 30 minutes before an appointment. This feature will be available to all users in February 2005.
Task Manager, Accessing: You access the task manager from your diary screen, select the diary icon from the top tool bar, in the top right hand corner of the diary screen you will see five icons, the last one is a telephone; select this to view the diary screen of the task manager.
|
Selecting the first icon and than the telephone will display the task manager in day view. To change the display to week view select the second icon with the eight squares. The screens automatically default to today (day View) or this week (week View).
|
|
If a user has permission to set-up tasks for other users set to true in security settings it is possible to select a user from the drop down list located on the top right hand corner of the diary screen and add tasks and appointments. Note: The drop down list is only available to users with the correct permissions. |
Task Manager, Changing The Date: To the right of the view selection are your date selection controls, you can select a date using the button to the right of the date field. From the calendar point and double click on the date required your selection will be entered into this field with the diary screen displaying records for the chosen date. It is also possible to manually enter a date by highlighting the current day field, selecting delete then typing the date you wish to move to in a DD/MM/YY format.
Positioned
to the right of the date field are the date controls
Date Field 1 2 3 4 5
v 1 = Back one week
v 2 = Back one day
v 3 = Always selects today
v 4 = Forward one day
v 5 = Forward one week
Multiple selections will move the date forward or backwards a week or a day at a time depending on the control in use.
Task Manager, Day View: Selecting day view displays the screen split into two sections, tasks and appointments. Tasks are listed with an icon indicating the task status – Icons represent the following:
· Clock – A reminder has been set and the task is pending
· Exclamation Mark – Task is pending and overdue
· Green Tick – Indicates the task has been completed
Tasks have titles that are displayed in the titles list, to create a new task select the last line which displays the words < Create New Task >
Local tasks are displayed in blue, contact tasks are coloured green
|
Fig 12.01 Task Manager Day View
To The right of the task manager screen is the appointments list, appointments are set with a from / to time which is displayed as a yellow block in the specified time cells. Appointments can be made for any time frame in 15 minute intervals. Title of the entry is displayed in the appropriate cell.
Task Manager, Printing Tasks Appointments: Auto Easy allows you to print a task or appointment log of all items displayed on the screen. Select the print button at the top of the screen an option to print either the task or appointment log is displayed on selecting the items recorded for the day assigned to the user will be printed. If the task has been completed the date / time / user / notes are printed.
|
|
Task Manager, Week View: You have the option to view a week of tasks and appointments, to display the week view select the second icon with eight squares positioned at the top of the diary screen. The week view is split into 7 days recorded are the appointments and tasks including the start and finish times.
|
Fig 12.02 Task Manager Week View
The eighth grid displays tasks for the week including title and status, it is possible to enter new appointments and tasks by selecting the < create new > option in the day or task cells.
|
Both the appointment and task log are displayed on screen, to print select the print icon on the top right hand side of the print screen.
Note: Only tasks and appointments relating to the current user are displayed, if a user is authorised to create tasks or appointment for other users the created item will not be displayed on the current users screen. To view these entries the user would have to log off, then log back on as another user.
Task Manager, Creating A New Appointment: Point and double click on the time cell you wish the appointment to start at, this action will open the appointment form.
Fig 12.03 Appointment Form |
Enter a title for the appointment, next select the arrow to the right of the for field. A list of options is displayed including the ability to set the appointment for a specific user (if the current user has the authority) The date will automatically default to today in the date field, if you wish to change this select the button to the right, point and double click on your selection; the date is entered in the field. Next select the time you wish to perform the appointment to commence and the finish time. If you wish to be reminded (authorised users only) select the remind option followed by the down arrow to the right of the field displaying 30 minutes before, make your choice from the drop down menu by double clicking. The reminder can also be repeated on a daily / weekly / fortnightly or monthly basis. Select repeat followed by the field to the right of your selection Finally you can enter notes relating to the purpose of the appointment. |
Task Manager, Viewing An Appointment: Details of an appointment can be viewed from either the diary screen in week or day view by pointing and clicking on the entry
Task Manager, Editing An Appointment: To edit an appointment go to diary day or week view, point and double click on the appointment you wish to edit, make the changes and save using OK (F12).
Task Manager, Deleting An Appointment: If you wish to delete an appointment open the task manager in day or week view, highlight the entry you wish to delete and press the delete button on you keyboard, confirm your action from the message box by selecting yes.
Task Manager, Creating A New Task: To create a new task select and double click- create new task from the task cell (week view) or the task list (day View). The local task form is displayed.
Fig 12.04 Task Form |
Enter a title for the task in the first field, next select the arrow to the right of the for field. A list of options is displayed including the ability to set the task for a specific user, group or anyone. The date will automatically default to today in the due field, if you wish to change this select the button to the right, point and double click on your selection; the date is entered in the field. Next select the time you wish to perform the task. If you wish to be reminded (authorised users only) select the remind option followed by the down arrow to the right of the field displaying 30 minutes before, make your choice from the drop down menu by double clicking. The reminder can also be repeated on a daily / weekly / fortnightly or monthly basis. Select repeat followed by the field to the right of your selection. Checklists can be attached to a local task, select the button to the right of the checklist field. Stored checklists are displayed, make your selection and press OK. The title of the checklist is now visible. It is possible to link this task directly to a client in which case it is converted from a local to a contact task. |
Task Manger, Creating A Contact Task: Select the button to the right of the client field this will open your client listing, search for the client in the normal way, highlight and select OK (F12) from the bottom of the client list. The client’s name and contact details are inserted in the client and additional info fields.
Fig 12.06 Creating A Contact Task |
The task is also recorded in the client form / tasks section The author of the task is recorded at the bottom of the task form. This is an automated entry based on the current user. To save the tasks select OK (F12) from the bottom of the form. The record will now display on both the day and week views of your diary screen. |
|
Fig 12.07 Viewing A Task From The Client Form
Editing A Task: To edit a task go to diary day or week view or the client form tasks option, point and double click on the task you wish to edit, make the changes and save using OK (F12).
Task Manager, Deleting A Task: If you wish to delete a task open the task manager in day or week view, highlight the entry you wish to delete and press the delete button on you keyboard, confirm your action from the message box by selecting yes.
Task Checklists, Adding: The task manager allows you to add checklists to both local and contact tasks. Checklists contain line items with a number assigned and checkboxes, each component of a checklist can be individually flagged as completed this is indicated by a tick in the checkbox at the beginning of the line. To add checklists to a task perform the following:
1) Open the task form by pointing and clicking on a recorded task or < Create New Task > option.
2) Click on the button to the right of the checklist field
3) Highlight the checklist you wish to add, attach by selecting OK(F12)
4) Save your changes to the task form by selecting OK(F12)
Fig 12.08 Selecting A Task |
From the select checklist display it is possible to add new checklists, edit and delete by selecting the required function from the bottom of the list. You can search for a checklist by typing the title in the search field. |
Task Checklists, Creating: To create a new checklist go to the select a checklist display and perform the following:
1) Select New from the bottom of the list
2) The checklist details form is displayed, to add an item select Add
3) Type the line text into the checklist item box and save with OK(F12)
4) Repeat item 3 for each line of the checklist to save the checklist select OK(F12)
Tasks, Completing: To complete a task select the complete option from the bottom of the task form, checklist (if attached) and completion notes are now visible.
|
The tt
To confirm completion of an item within a checklist point and click on the line a tick will be displayed in the checkbox. Enter your completion notes and save by selecting OK (F12).
Note: The task will always be completed by the current logged on user, the date and time is recorded as the form is saved.
Printing A Task Checklist: Select the print checklist option at the bottom of the screen.
Task Reminders, Pop Ups: authorised users can set tasks to display pop up reminders, these are messages that are displayed at a set time before a task is due (set from the task form).
Fig 12.11 Task Reminder |
There are four options available from the task reminder. Firstly you can reset the remind again period by pointing and clicking on the arrow to the right on the field and selecting a new time period from the list. |
Secondly you can select the snooze option that will remove the reminder from the screen for the time displayed in the remind again field. You can dismiss (cancel) the reminder by selecting the dismiss option. Finally if you wish to view / edit the task details select the details option.
Marketing, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate has been designed to maximise database-marketing opportunities using functions that are easy to execute. Link to Microsoft Word 95 or later versions to produce in house customer communications, or alternatively Genesis can process records for you when they are automatically exported via an Internet connection. Reports are also available displaying services due or service reminders not responded to, the client form also indicates whether a service reminder has been successful.
To assist you with your marketing activities there is an in-built loyalty program and the ability to issue roadside assistance to a client. You can also keep in touch via email through the contact manager.
Demographic reporting is available allowing you to view critical information on the client and vehicle database. This report is designed to assist business operators with critical marketing decisions on issues such as in which suburbs marketing campaigns should be run. Information from this report will also assist when making decisions on what parts should be stocked.
Loyalty Functions
Loyalty, Function Overview: Loyalty marketing helps you retain customers – which help you increase profits. The typical business loses almost half its customer base every five years. Businesses that understand the impact of this customer attrition and take steps to stem losses can realize dramatic profit gains. Increased profits result from reduced acquisition costs, increased cross-selling, a high customer referral rate, decreased price sensitivity, and lower operating costs.
On average, the cost of acquiring a new customer is five to 10 times greater than the cost of retaining a current customer. Do you know what share of your current customers’ business your business has today? It’s not uncommon for very successful businesses to have less than 50% of their current customers’ business.
Repairers that are on the cutting edge of loyalty programs reap lasting benefits. Being the first repairer in your area to launch a loyalty program pays real dividends. The first business has the advantage in customer retention — and latecomers into mature loyalty environments have little hope of gaining incremental business, or spend a great deal trying to make inroads. Either way, being the first in is an advantage.
Customer loyalty is different from customer satisfaction. Between 65% and 85% of customers who defect report that they were satisfied or very satisfied with the repairer from which they removed their business. Customer satisfaction is extremely important but customer loyalty is the key to repeat purchasing and long term success. Genesis has created strategies that allow you to retain high levels of customer service and satisfaction as well as achieving high levels of customer loyalty. Auto Easy can help you do all of the above. The goal of every business is to improve the bottom line. If you are interested in gaining and retaining customers then please consider using the loyalty program.
Auto Easy Ultimate has the ability to allocate points to a client reward account based on dollars spent. It is suggested these points be redeemed for a free service, functionality allows for the entry of a redemption value on the service record. A statement of points to date is also printed on the invoice if the track loyalty point’s function is set to true in the site settings.
Auto Easy prints a loyalty
statement on the invoice
Loyalty, Settings: Before you can use the loyalty program the settings need to be correct for the feature to operate. Select file / settings from the top of the screen go to the program options tab flag track loyalty points to true, save with OK or F12. Next you need to decide which services will initiate the loyalty program, how many points will be allocated for each dollar spent on those services and which services will have a redemption value and how much. Once these decisions have been made you are ready to set your loyalty parameters for each service
Roadside Assistance, Overview: Genesis administers a national roadside assistance plan for Auto Easy users. It is also possible to cover vehicles for roadside assistance (RSA) by flagging the field trigger RSA on the service form. When a service is performed with the choice set to true roadside assistance details will be printed at the bottom of the invoice including contact phone number and RSA membership number. Vehicles flagged for the issue of roadside assistance can be exported using an Internet connection or setting up the necessary form letter in Microsoft Word can produce membership cards in house.
Roadside Assistance, Settings: You need to turn the roadside assistance functions on from the site settings. Select file / settings from the top of the screen, click on the program options, click on the track RSA option.
|
You need to setup the RSA parameters RSA option, enter the service provider’s phone number and save your changes with OK (F12).
Roadside Assistance, Viewing Details Roadside assistance details can be viewed from the vehicle record or vehicle listing, note the RSA number is the site id followed by the customer number. The membership details are also printed on the invoice.
|
Details include the service phone number in the site settings, membership number and the expiree date. The invoice acts as interim membership as it takes up to 2 weeks to receive a membership card
|
Marketing, Selecting: To access marketing functions open the diary by selecting the diary icon from the top toolbar. Next select the tasks manager icon from the top left hand side of the display, to view the marketing options select the marketing button at the top of the task manager.
Fig 12.16 Accessing marketing functions
Selection opens the client data extraction screen; from here you can select various filters to export the data you wish to mail merge in your word processor. A list of all records within the search criteria is displayed, from this screen you can deselect individual records fro export, once the results have been edited the data can be exported.
Auto Easy creates an export file named Extract.Txt which is located in a letters sub directory of your program folder. If you are using Microsoft Word you have the option to automatically open the program displaying a letter of your choice.
12.17 Data Extraction Screen
Marketing, Exporting Data: Auto Easy has the ability to filter customer and vehicle databases; export data is in ASCII comma delimited format that can be mail merged into a word processor document. The marketing module allows you to search databases using the following criteria:
|
Clients With Vehicles Due For A Service: Select if you are searching for vehicle due for service From / To: Enter a date range by free typing in DD/MM/YY format or use the button to the right of the date fields to select from the calendar.
|
|
|
|
Vehicle Criteria: Select if you are exporting by vehicle criteria. EFI, Automatic, Air Conditioning, Power Steering: Point and click on your selection, your selections can be multiple ie: EFI & Automatic will export all vehicles with EFI or Automatic as well as vehicles with both. You can also narrow your search by selecting the make and model from the vehicle list, plus fuel type click on the button to the right of the field, point and double click on the appropriate record.
|
|
|
|
Clients With Vehicles Due For Warranty Of Fitness Or Registration Renewal: Select if you are searching for vehicle due for checks. From / To: Enter a date range by free typing in DD/MM/YY format or use the button to the right of the date fields to select from the calendar.
|
|
|
|
Any: Exports a list of all clients and vehicles Selective: Displays the client listing allowing for single or multiple selections. A/C only: Filters for account customers only. With A Category Of: Select if you wish to export clients in a specific category. Clicking on the button to the right of the field displays your client category listing. Highlight the record confirm your selection with OK (F12). Enter a from / to date (select from calendar) to view / export all clients created within a date range. |
|
|
|
Any: Exports a list of all clients and vehicles that have are members of your loyalty plan. Loyalty Plan Clients Only: Exports a list of all clients and vehicles that have are members of your loyalty plan. Non-Loyalty Plan Clients Only: Exports a list of all clients and vehicles that are not members of your loyalty plan. Have A Certain Number Of Loyalty Points: Option allows you select clients with points within a certain range for export. |
|
|
|
Any: Exports any vehicle that has had roadside assistance. Clients With Current RSA Vehicles Only: Selection will export clients and vehicles with current roadside assistance Clients With Non-RSA Vehicles Only: Clients and vehicles that have never had roadside assistance issued. Clients Whose Vehicle RSA Expires: Allows you to enter a date range for expirees.
|
|
|
|
Any: Exports a list of all clients and vehicles that have had a service. Had A Service: Option allows the entry of a specific date range. Only clients serviced in that period are exported. Selecting the button to the right of the date fields displays a calendar for easy date entry Have Had No Service Since: Enter the required date. Only customers that have no services recorded are exported. |
|
|
|
Allows the user to view clients / vehicles that have current bookings in the system. This search criteria allows you to communicate via letter or SMS to remind clients due for service within a specified date range. |
Client Data Options: The data extraction screen allows the operator to choose further search criteria:
Extract Client Details Only (No Vehicle Details): Selecting this option will display client details only with no duplications.
Include Hidden Clients: By default all search criteria excludes hidden (inactive) clients, selecting this options allows you to override the default and include inactive clients.
Clients With Mobile Numbers Only: Select this option if you are sending a group SMS message so only clients with mobile numbers are selected.
Include Hidden Vehicle: The search will include any vehicles that are inactive in your vehicle listing if this selection is set to true.
Clients With Email Addresses Only: Select this option when using email as your communication media, only clients with email address will populate your list.
Postcodes: multiple postcodes require a space between each entry
Marketing, Data Extraction: To initialize the data extraction make your selection from the search criteria screen and select OK (F12) the results of your data search are now in view. All records are flagged for export by default, however if you choose not to export a single or multiple records pointing and clicking on the tick at the end of the line will deselect the entry.
Fig 12.18 Search Results Display
It is possible to view data and perform other functions from this screen including establishing a new contact task for a client. Options are:
Opens the contact details
/ client form.
Selection allows you
to make a booking for the client and vehicle.
Displays the vehicle form associated
with the highlighted record.
Displays the note form – entering
text adds a note entry to the client task list.
Opens a new task form - allowing
you setup a contact task for the highlighted client.
Prints the results screen to
your report printer.
Initiates the data export
Marketing, Extract Options: Auto Easy is provided with 4 standard marketing and 1 credit collection letters in Microsoft Word format. The menu on the right of the text export screen will not be accessible until the link to Word document option is selected.
Fig 12.19 Text Export Options |
To initiate an export to Microsoft Word highlight the required letter file name and select extract, Word will open displaying your selection. To merge select the merge icon from the database tool bar. This feature will work with Microsoft Word 6.0 or later
|
The letters and data can be used in other word processing packages. However the operator will have to set up the mail merge facility using the data that is exported from Auto Easy in ASCII format form the file C:\[Your Working Folder]\Letters\Extract.txt. This file is recreated each time a search is performed on the database.
Word documents that are loaded with the package can be edited using the normal word processor functions. Ensure that any changes are saved; you will also need to change the signatory on all the letters.
Fig 12.20 Merging Extracted Data In Word 2003
Vehicle - Registration, Make, Model, Type, Month, Year, Model Code, Odometer, Colour, EFI, Auto, AirCon, Power, VIN Number, Cylinders, Tyre Sizes, Engine Capacity, Ignition Key, Last Service Date, Next Service Due, Next Service Due Date, Rego Check Date, Next Warrant Date, RSA Number, First RSA From Date, Current RSA From Date, RSA Expiry Date,
Service Reminders
Marketing, Adding Service Reminders: The service reminder form can be accessed from the vehicle form or job update screen as a job is finalised. To open from the vehicle record, select vehicles from the icon menu bar, search for the record required, and highlight double mouse click or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the list. Select the services tab, click on the service reminder button to add, edit or delete service reminders. To view the service reminder form from the job update screen click on the service reminder button.
Selecting the service reminder
option from either the vehicle form or job update screen will open the
service reminder form.
Marketing, Automating Follow On Service Records: Auto Easy allows you to attach single or multiple follow on services to the service form. Follow on services are entered to the service reminder form automatically as the job is closed. To set up a follow on service, select services from the icon menu at the top of the screen, search for the service you wish to edit or add a new one. From the service form select the button to the right of the follow on service field. The service listing is displayed highlight the service you require, confirm with OK (F12). The service is displayed in the follow on service field, enter the duration between services in the month’s field and kilometers in the Kms field, and select OK (F12) from the vehicle form to save.
|
Fig 12.21 Adding A Follow On Service
Marketing, Service Reminder Form: The service reminder form allows you to view, edit, add and delete service reminders to add a service reminder select add from the bottom of the form, this action opens the service listing. Select the service or services required a tick is visible against each of your selections. When complete select OK (F12) to save. Enter the distance to travel and duration between services.
Fig 12.22 Service Reminder Form |
Service Reminders, Deleting Existing: Open the service reminder form; highlight the record, select remove from the bottom of the display window. Services are displayed in ascending date order (next due at the top of the list)
|
Service Reminders, Editing New: You can edit new service reminders from the service reminder form by highlighting the record, selecting edit and changing the distance / time until next service fields.
Fig 12.23 Rego / Warrant reminders
Service Reminders, Registration / Warrant Of Fitness Renewals: It is possible to add registration and warrant of fitness renewals either on the vehicle or booking form. Auto Easy also provides a 6 month or 12 month option between servicing. To select, simply point and click in the required field. These options are also available from the booking form. Auto Easy will automatically move the due date forward according to the time selection when the next date of check is due.
Service Reminders, Viewing: Follow on services can be viewed form the vehicle listing, vehicle form, client form and service reminder form you also have access to two service reminder reports. Service reminders due showing all service reminders due in the future and no response which displays a list of services not performed.
Vehicle listing: To view services due from the vehicle listing select vehicles from the icon menu bar, the grid displays next service type and date.
Fig 12.24 viewing Services Due From The Vehicle Listing
Vehicle Form: Select the vehicle record you wish to view, double click or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the listing, select the services tab to display the last service performed and next service due.
|
For a more detailed view of services due click the service reminder button to open the service reminders form.
|
Demographic Reporting
Demographic Reporting, Overview: Auto Easy allows you take a snap shot of your business for any period when running a demographic analysis. This vital report analyses your data by various criteria including where your customers are coming from, how they heard of you, how many were male / female or counter sales, what type of vehicles they drive and how much they spend.
Used correctly this report will give you the information required on where you should run your next marketing campaign, what parts you should carry and whether your average sale is increasing.
Demographic Reporting, Compiling: To run a demographic report select Reports / Marketing / Demographic Analysis from the top of the screen, select a date range and confirm with OK (F12).
Demographic Reporting, Format: The report is split into the following sections:
Customer Analysis
Suburb – Where your customers
are coming from by suburb in numeric and graphical format.
Media – How customers came to hear of you by media type data is extracted
from the media
section of the client form.
Customer Type – Male, female and other (relates to business or cash
sales)
New Customers – New customers gained over the report period, existing
clients that purchased goods or services.
Vehicles
Make – Vehicle
makes serviced over the report period in numeric and graphical format.
Vehicle
Year – Year of manufacture for vehicles serviced.
Kilometres
– kilometres on each vehicle serviced
Vehicle
Type – Sedan, 4 wheel drive, hatch, coupe
Cylinders
– Amount of cylinders by vehicle serviced
Auto,
EFI, Pwr Steering, AirCon – How many had these features
Fig 12.29 Vehicle Analysis
Job Analysis
Job
Start Day - Based
on the day of the week a job or invoice was created.
Total Value - Value of invoices over the report period
Gross Profit - Gross profit created from each sale
Labour – Dollar value and percentage of total labour invoice value
Job Gross – Gross profit by and as a percentage of total gross profit
Labour – Labour percentage as a total of the invoice value
Payment Method – Media types by number and as a percentage of total
transactions
Fig 12.30 Job Analysis / Job Start Day
The report can be exported to Excel or Lotus
notes for further analysis, it is suggested you run this report on a regular
basis performing comparisons by report period.
Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate allows the operator to track responses from specified promotions listed on the client intro report available from the marketing reports group. To track promotion responses, promotions must be listed in the promotions database, once recorded a promotion response can be selected from the booking form or when prompted while using the step through booking feature. The client intro report will display a summary of responses to promotions in both statistical (number & %) and graphical formats. A further report titled Promotion Responses displays the detail (Job, sales value & profit) of recorded responses.
Promotions, Adding To The Listing: To begin tracking promotion responses you are first required to enter details into the promotions listing. Select lists from the top of the screen from the drop down menu select promotions this will open the promotions list, to add a new promotion select new from the bottom of the display, enter the promotion name, code, start and finish dates and save using OK (F12). The item is added to the list.
Promotions, Recording Responses: Responses to promotions can be tracked by selecting when prompted during the stepped booking process or by making a selection from the booking form.
Fig 12.32 Selecting From The Stepped Booking Process |
Fig 12.33 Selecting From The Booking Form |
It is possible to go back to the booking form and change the promotion selection at anytime regardless of the booking status.
Promotions, Viewing Responses: To view responses, select reports from the top of your screen from the drop down menu select the sales group, to display / print the report point and double click on the Promotion Response Report option, enter the date range you wish to report on and select OK (F12).
It is also possible to view a summary of responses from the marketing group of reports by selecting the client intro option entering the date range and selecting OK. To print either of these reports select the print icon in the top left hand corner of the display.
Fig 12.34 Promotion Response Report
Overview: Auto Easys allows the user to track service and profitability values for services added to a job card after the original booking has been generated. The statistics are then compared to give the operator an overview of the extra work that is being sold in a specified period.
It is important that you understand how this report is generated to gain maximum benefit from this feature. The report is split into two sections, booked sales and up-sell sales, booked sales relate to services that were originally added to the booking form, up-sell sales records services that were added to the job card while the original work was in progress.
Upsell Report, Viewing And Printing: To view / print the Upsell report select reports from the top of your screen, point and double click on the sales reports group, select Upsell Report, enter your data range or select a period, select OK (F12) to generate the report. If you wish to print the display select the print icon in the top left hand corner of the display.
Fig 12.35 Up-Sell Report Format
Internet, Transfers Overview: Genesis has developed a central marketing system which can mange all your regular communications on – line including service reminders, registration renewals and roadside assistance issues. To access this feature you first need to be registered with Genesis, contact sales@microbse.com.au or visit www.Genesis.com.au for further information. Our web site can be accessed from the on – line menu, from the home screen select services. You need a standard internet connection to utilise this service and have access to a phone line. Auto Easy Ultimate can prompt you to upload data on a predetermined day, the program initialises a call connects to our server via your Internet service provider, uploads vehicle and client records then requests you to hang up. Service reminders and roadside assistance cards are dispatched by Genesis to your clients; you receive a marketing report on a monthly basis.
Internet, Transfers Setup: Auto Easy gives you the option to display an export data prompt on a day of your choice for a specified time range. To establish the day and times select file / settings, from the settings form select the replication tab, select enable replication on this machine. Next select automatic or manual from the drop down box
Fig 12.36 Setting Export Configuration |
In the example your machine will connect to the Genesis server automatically (if your site is not connected to the internet Auto Easy will initiate a dial-up) weekly on a Monday at 6.00am. If the first attempt to connect is unsuccessful three further attempts will be initiated.
|
Internet, Transferring Data: There are two ways to replicate your data, either by setting the replication process to automatic or manual. If manual is selected a prompt will be displayed on the screen requesting you to upload on the day and time specified. Alternatively a replication can be performed at anytime by selecting the On-Line Menu from the top of screen, pointing and clicking on the replication option, this action will initiate a connection to the internet server.
Fig 12.37 On-Line Menu |
On selecting yes from the manual prompt or replicate from the on – line menu a file transfer status box is displayed (please ensure your modem is turned on and connected to a phone line before proceeding) the box displays the export status. When the data transfer is complete a confirmation message is displayed “Export Successful”.
Finally you will be prompted to hang up if you wish to go off line select yes from the message box
Note: You must have your machine set to enable replication for this function to work.
|
Email, Functions Overview: Auto Easy has the ability to send emails directly from the client listing, client card, job card or quotation form the subject matter and reference is recorded in the task section with the ability to view the attachment sent. All that is needed for you to access this function is a standard Internet connection and your outgoing mail server details.
Email, Set up: Ensure your email address is entered in the site settings / details form, next click on the on-line tab and record your mail server address in the field provided.
|
|
Email, Client Direct: Complete the email field on the client form; it is best to double check the entry as just one character out of place will render the communication useless To email a single client highlight the record from the listing. Select the email function at the bottom of the client list. This action will take you directly to the note form with email selected as the contact method, enter a title, type your text in body of the form and select OK(F12) to send the email. The communication is recorded in your task list.
Emails. Viewing: All communications with the client are listed in tasks view, emails are listed as notes, if an attachment has been sent to a client a reference is displayed in the item column. To view an email, point and double click on the line. If an attachment has been sent it is possible to view the form by selecting the icon. The form is displayed in PDF format this can be reprinted from the viewer if required.
|
Fig 12.39 Viewing Sent Emails
|
Email, Deleting Sent Items: To delete an entry open the client form select Tasks Tab highlight the record and select delete from the bottom of the form, confirm your selection and the entry will be removed.
Email, Marketing: Auto Easy allows you to communicate marketing messages via email, to perform this task open the marketing screen, select your search criteria and select OK(F12). The results of your search are displayed, when using email also select the clients with email addresses only option. Next you need to select or create the email message, select the email option from the bottom of the results page you are taken to a list of messages, from this screen you can select an existing message or create a new one by selecting the new option at the bottom of the display.
Fig 12.41 Selecting An Email Message
Highlight the message you wish to send and select OK(F12) confirm from the display that you wish to proceed with the send, a final message will confirm the send.
Email Messages, Creating: You can create and store email messages by selecting email messages from the lists menu, alternatively create a message from the list as you proceed through the sending option.
Enhanced Email with Integrated Booking Function: As a business owner you get inundated with communications every day, email, letters, pamphlets and newspapers to name a just few, due to the sheer volume of material we become extremely good at “media filtering”. Think about this how many times have you received a communication possibly a letter or email and thought you would deal with the content at a later date, then completely forgotten to follow through? It happens. How much easier would it be if there was an immediate call for action that simplifies the response? You can send a plain text message to your client via the marketing function which is in danger of ending up in the to do or even worse the delete folder as it just does not present as anything that needs your client’s attention.
To give you the best chance of an immediate response Genesis has taken a different approach by implementing the following:
1) The email arrives as a letter complete with mail merge, logo and power margin—Not just plain
text
2) There is a book now option on the email, clicking this will simply require your client to enter the
preferred date and time they would like their vehicle serviced.
3) Booking is transferred to the site and populates the diary, the site must then go through the
confirmation process, this can be handled via a phone call (if an alternate date and time is
suggested), email or text message (to confirm the client’s request).
The management process will populate your booking form automatically, no need to find the client, vehicle details or service due, the only time you will need to edit a repeat booking is when an alternate date / time is agreed. When the vehicle arrives simply open the booking and create the job card.
Fig 12.42 Enhanced email marketing
Service
Costs: Genesis will incur
extra costs to provide this service to it’s client base, any site wishing
to send template emails and take advantage of the return booking feature
will be charged a flat fee, please contact Genesis for the current
charges, fees are not volume based.
Enhanced Emailing Function: If you wish to use this service you will need to accept the terms and conditions of service, these display the first time you select the enhanced email function from marketing. Agree to these terms and you are a registered service user.
Enhanced Emailing, Service Reminder Search: Go to marketing either from the diary task tool bar or the activities menu; enter your search date range
|
Select clients with email addresses only from other options on the data extraction screen, select OK (F12) you are presented with a list of clients with email addresses due for service in the selected date range. If you do not with to send a reminder to a client deselect the record by pointing and clicking in the check box at the end of the line to clear the tick. |
||
|
Select the Enhanced email option from the lower tool bar. | ||
|
Next a confirmation screen is displayed to send the emails simply select the Yes option on the bottom right hand side of the screen. The emails are dispatched. A record of the communication is written to the client card under the task tab. |
||
|
|
|
|
Service Reminders, Client Function: The client will receive an email from you titled friendly service reminder, when the on-line booking option is selected the client is requested to complete the date and time service is required and submit the request to the site that generated the reminder.
|
The client selects the click here option on the letter. date and time service is required is displayed, the client can free type the date or select from the on-line calendar. Completing the function by selecting send will initiate the booking retrieval process at the designated site. Genesis displays a confirmation message to the client indicating the booking as been sent successfully.
The site PC is set to check for bookings every minute, if a booking is logged on our server the site will be prompted to accept the on-line booking. A confirmation is required, either via email, SMS or phone, once confirmed select the OK option to import the booking. |
Fig 12.43 Remote booking form displaying reject, accept and dismiss options
Bookings, Receiving: The remote booking form allows you to reject (cancel) the booking, accept or dismiss, if you choose dismiss the form will reappear after 5 minutes. Accepting the booking asks you to confirm client contact
|
Confirming the contact will take you to the booking form, select the agreed date and time, OK (F12) will enter the booking onto your diary, including client, vehicle and service details. Booking will only be received on the nominated machine, this can be set by opening file / settings / on-line and selecting the on-line booking function on the bottom right hand side of the display. |
Editing Enhanced Emails – It is possible to edit the content of the standard enhanced email form. Select File / Settings / On – Line on the bottom left hand side of the form are the enhanced email settings to edit the email select the button to the right.
Fig 12.44 Editing The Enhanced Email Form
Text is displayed in HTML format, when editing only change the body text unless you know HTML do not change any of the symbols these ensure format is correct. If you wish to merge new fields select the merge field option and select your requirements from the menu. It is also possible to preview the results at anytime be selecting the preview option. The reset function restores the form back to standard, save your changes by selecting OK (F12).
Overview: Auto Easy allows you send SMS messages to clients by utilising an internet gateway to a telecommunications service provider. You are able to store multiple SMS messages, even select a default message that you would like sent to clients as the job card is closed. To access this service you must contact Genesis to set-up an account, on acceptance you will be provided with a logon and password, your location will be billed on a monthly basis for the amount of SMS traffic generated.
SMS Messaging, Set-up: If you wish to take advantage of this service you will need an internet connection and account name and password. Contact Genesis for your logon and password, when you receive this you will need to enter the details into the program settings. Click on File / Settings, from the settings screen select the online tab.
|
From the online screen select the Enable SMS sending option, enter the user name and password into the fields provided. If you wish to send a message on job close select the option. To choose a default message click on the button to the right of the send SMS on job close field, your SMS messages list will display, highlight the message you wish to make the default, click OK (F12). |
SMS Messaging, Managing Messages: Messages are managed from the Select an SMS display, this is selected from either lists – SMS Messages – Settings – Marketing. To add a new message to your list click on New (Insert) located at the bottom of the list. Complete the SMS detail form and save with OK (F12) highlight the message you wish to send and select OK (F12). To delete a message highlight the entry and select delete from the bottom menu bar. Editing requires you to once again highlight the record and select Edit (F2) make your changes and save to file with OK (F12).
Fig 12.45 Selecting An SMS Message
SMS Messaging, Sending: You can send SMS messages from either the job card on job close (if a default message has been selected) or you can use the search criteria in marketing to select single clients or groups to send a message to.
Job Card – Job Close: This is an automated function that sends an SMS to your client as you close the job card. For this to work you must select the send SMS on job close function in settings / online. It is possible to choose an alternative message as you close the job or send no message by selecting cancel from the message display.
Marketing: You can use any of the search criteria from marketing to create a list to SMS to, however be sure to select the Clients with mobile number only option from the bottom of the data extraction screen.
Choosing this option ensures only clients with mobile numbers recorded on their client card are listed. Once you have selected the criteria you wish to search by, select extract, the list will be displayed. To send an SMS select the SMS option from the bottom of the display
Your list of SMS messages will display, highlight the message you wish to send and select OK (F12). A message box informs you of how many SMS messages have been successfully sent.
Note: You MUST have an active Internet connect for this function to work.
.
Fig. 12.46 SMS from the client card |
SMS Messaging, Client Card: If you wish to send an SMS message to a single client, go to the client listing highlight the record point and double click, select the task tab and from the bottom of the screen point and click on note. Enter a heading into the top field followed by the message you wish to send in the additional info section. To send the message select the arrow to the right of the contact method field and choose SMS – Click OK to finalise.
The message is recorded in the task section of the client card, to view send messages point and double click on the line item. |
SMS Messaging, Receiving: The SMS gateway facilitates both sending and receiving of messages, a client can reply to any message sent from Auto Easy, you will be notified of any incoming messages via a prompt that will display at any point within the application. The received message is logged in the task section of the client card.
Fig. 12.47 Receiving SMS Messages
The client / company name and mobile number is displayed, to read a message point and double click on the line.
SMS Messaging, Logging: All SMS messages are recorded in a log file, to view / print this select Reports / Other Reports / SMS Log, Select the date range you wish to search and select OK. Messages are listed in date order, with the number of messages recorded at the bottom of the report.
Reports, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate provides an extensive suite of reports for all accounting and marketing functions. Reports are accessed from a drop down menu listing the report types; a further sub-menu displays the selection available. Our reporting module gives you the ability to view on screen, print to your local or network printer or even export into popular formats for display in programs such as Excel and Lotus.
Reports, Selection: The reports available consist on the following:
Accounts Receivable |
|
Open Invoices By Customer |
Displays a list of all invoices with outstanding balances, including sub total by customer and a grand total. |
Receivables Aging Summary |
Displays a list of customers with an outstanding balance listing in columns current, 30 days, 60 days, 90 days and 120 days plus
|
Invoice Summary |
This report can be run over any date range. It displays a list of invoices by customer, vehicle and registration number including a break down of parts, labour and gross profit with a grand total on all data columns
|
Receipts Report |
The report can be run for any date range. Displays all payments received including media, to assist with till balancing it also contains details of any purchases processed during the report period
|
Client Activity |
Allows you to view the sales and payment history by single client |
|
|
Service Sales Summary |
The report is run on date range and displays performance by service including number of services sold, labour, parts, gross profit on parts and total gross profit by service. Sub total include fixed price and mechanical work performed.
|
Item Sales Summary |
Summarises item sales over a chosen date range by category |
Sales Detail By Invoice |
Allows for the selection of jobs and or invoices, displays item detail including cost, retail, and gross profit both as a dollar and percentage value. |
Sales Detail By Date |
Select a date range to view job and or invoice details including cost, retail, and gross profit both as a dollar and percentage value.
|
Job Summary Report |
Can run for any date range or period – displays parts, labour sales by client category including value of sub-contract work sold |
Adjustments |
Reports on invoice and job re-openings and deletions. Detail includes original and closing invoice value plus employee name. |
Promotion Response Report |
Lists responses by promotion type including client vehicle and sales value |
Upsell Report |
Itemises service sales based on whether they were added to the booking form or directly onto the job card. Provides comparison statistics in both dollar and percentage vales |
Exception Report |
Allows the operator to run a sales exception report over any date range based on % of gross profit above / below a stated value for parts or services. Matches also display the % variable value. |
Sales Performance |
Services sold on a daily basis includes average values
|
Client Spend |
Search by date range to view clients in order of spend value |
Service detail Report |
Search by date range for job detail, includes services sold, hours by service, parts and labour values.
|
|
|
|
|
Item Purchase Detail |
Reports by item on purchases made over a selected period including supplier, billing number and quantity purchased.
|
Supplier Purchase Detail |
Ability to select a single or multiple suppliers, choose a date range and display all item purchase detail.
|
Supplier Purchase Summary |
Displays total purchases by supplier and month over a pre-selected period. Ability to view all or choose single or multiple suppliers.
|
Supplier Report By Item Category |
Displays a list of suppliers, providing purchase summary data by category. Totalises the value of purchases by category including a grand total of all category purchases.
|
Purchase Transaction Report |
Purchases by account and cost centre including supplier and authorised person details. |
Purchases By Allocation |
Allows the user to view allocations of inventory and buy-ins to jobs over a selected date range |
|
|
| |
|
|
Inventory Valuation |
Ability to select single, multiple or all categories Lists inventory items on hand including financial information by item. Report includes sub totals by category and a grand total of the value of all categories. |
|
|
Inventory Stock Status |
Displays inventory by category including quantities on hand, minimum levels, items required for jobs and items on order |
|
|
Re-Order Report |
Can be run by category or supplier. The report displays all items below the minimum order level calculating suggested quantities based on the difference between stock on hand and maximum quantity settings. |
|
|
Price List |
Displays the retail prices of all inventory / non-inventory items by category selection or all. |
|
|
Barcode Print Out |
Only available once the barcode module is registered. Prints barcode sheets & labels by selection or stock received.
|
Stock Adjustments |
Displays stock adjustments made including quantity, total value and employee name. |
|
|
Item Detail |
The report can be filtered by category (view single / multiple or all) displays cost, retail, wholesale and trade prices including GP and % for each price point.
|
Stock Movement |
The report can be filtered by category (view single / multiple or all) the information can be sorted by sales and purchase quantity. The report has been written so you can identify slow moving parts and reduce stock holding or eliminate the item from your stock holding.
|
Inventory Overstock |
Reports on all items in stock that are over the maximum level – Lists by category |
| |
|
|
Supplier Invoices |
Lists unpaid / paid invoices and Credits by all or selected suppliers over any date range including totals owed to each supplier and days exceeded trading terms. |
|
|
Supplier Aging Summary |
Displays suppliers with an outstanding balance listing in columns current, 30 days, 60 days, 90 days and 120 days plus |
|
|
| |
|
|
Tax Detail |
Displays sales and purchases including tax component by tax code for a pre-selected date range. Ability to run on a cash or accrual basis. |
|
|
Tax Liability
BAS |
Can be run on a cash or accrual basis. Displays all tax liabilities over a pre-selected date range.
Run on a cash or accrual basis for a specified date range.
|
|
|
| |
|
|
By Date |
Can be filtered by transaction type and date, detail includes account and amount. |
|
|
By Account |
Lists transactions over a pre-selected date range by account. Detail includes supplier or client name, amounts and indicates if the transaction has been reconciled. |
|
|
| |
|
|
Profit & Loss |
|
|
|
Balance Sheet |
A report that summarises the financial position of your business. A balance sheet shows the value of your company's assets, liabilities, and equity as of a particular day. It is called a balance sheet because the value of the assets is always exactly equal to the combined value of the liabilities and equity.
|
|
|
Trial Balance |
In traditional accounting, a document that adds up all the debits and credits so that mistakes can be traced if debits don't equal credits. |
|
|
Journals & Transfers |
Lists all journals and transfers between accounts over a pre-selected date range. Includes a total of all transactions. |
|
|
Accountants Review |
Can be run on a cash or accrual basis, the report consists of the detail of all transactions over a pre-selected period. |
|
|
Profit & Loss Comparison |
Provides you with the ability to compare profit & loss statements with the same period from the previous year. Displayed is the dollar and % value of change between both set of financials.
|
Financial Summary |
The financial summary displays a “snap shot” of your financials for a selected period, including your average daily operating costs and daily average net profit. The report also totalises your key asset and liability accounts as of the last day of the report period.
|
KPI Report |
Displays Profit and Loss, gross profit ratios and productivity by technician |
|
|
|
|
Transaction Detail |
A listing that shows you your bank transactions both credits and deposits. For example, a transaction history for a customer payment shows the invoices to which you applied the payment and the bank deposit.
|
Deposit Detail |
Details deposits you've entered. Initially, the report covers this month-to-date, but you can change the period covered by choosing a different date range from the date’s drop-down list. The Name column lists the customers whose payments were included in the deposit. The Amount column shows how much of each customer's payment was included in the deposit.
|
| |
|
|
Payroll Summary |
Summarises payroll payments by employee for a pre-selected date range. Details include tax and superannuation deductions. |
|
|
Payroll Detail |
Displays detail of payroll payments by single, multiple or all employees. Details include payment media. |
|
|
Transaction Detail |
Details payment and deduction types by employee and pay period over a selected data range |
|
|
Holiday & Sick Allocations |
Details holiday and sick allowances by employee over a selected data range |
PAYG Payment Summary Statement
|
Allows you to print group certificates for a single or multiple employees |
Employee Detail Report
|
Ability to print individual employee details |
| |
|
|
Total Hours |
Displays or prints the details of all time allocations by job / technician plus there is a summary totaling actual hours worked and charged and contribution by employee including percentage of the total. |
|
|
Incentive Report |
Prints the hours allocated for a single technician by job, there is also the ability to enter a cut in point for a productivity incentive payment based on the hours exceeding the incentive threshold. Ie: report is run for 5 days with an incentive threshold of 30hours and incentive of $10.00, total hours charged 38 hours above the threshold equals 8 total incentive payable $80.00. |
|
|
Charged Verses Actual |
Ability to compare charges hours with actual hours worked by technician and job / invoice over a pre-selected period. |
|
|
Labour Allocation |
View the charged and actual hours worked by day and technicians, summarises the hours worked and charged for the pre-selected month displaying the variation between values. |
|
|
Worksheet |
Allows you to print a worksheet for a selected period by individual or multiple technicians |
|
|
Productivity |
Displays productivity for a selected day for all technicians |
|
|
| |
|
|
Client Service History |
Displays a list of work performed by client by vehicle including a financial summary. |
|
|
Vehicle Service History |
Displays a list of services performed on a selected vehicle including total invoice value |
|
|
Services Due |
Enter a date range in the future a list of services / registrations or warrants due over that period including customer contact details is displayed to screen to print the report select the print icon at the top of the display. |
|
|
No Response |
Enter a date range in the past a list of customers and vehicles for which the service dates have not changed is displayed to screen, details include clients phone numbers. |
|
|
Quotation Report |
Allows the operator to view all quotations that have not been converted to jobs over any date range. Includes quotation value. |
|
|
|
|
Demographic Report |
Run over any date range. The report contains valuable client and vehicle and sales information including graphs. Selecting the printer icon at the top of screen will print the report. |
|
|
Loyalty Report |
Displays current point status by client / vehicle including points accrued by service, redemptions and totals. |
|
|
Loyalty Statement |
Prints loyalty statements for single or multiple clients, shows points accrued by service and total to date. |
|
|
RSA Customer List |
Lists all customers and vehicles covered for roadside assistance includes start and expiree dates. |
Client Intro Report |
Details how clients came to hear of the site, how many were male / female and the level of response to promotions in both stastical and graphical formats |
|
|
Lists |
|
|
|
Fault List |
Prints all text entered into the vehicle faults database. |
|
|
Work Done
Category List |
Prints all text entered into the work done database
Prints category listings by group
|
Client List |
Allows you to print a client list filtered by category
|
Supplier List |
Allows for the display / printing of a current supplier listing including contact details, email and trading terms.
|
Account List |
Prints your chart of accounts with the ability to filter by accounts with balances only. |
|
|
Supplier |
Prints a supplier list including addresses and phone numbers |
|
|
Service |
Prints a list of services including stored parameters |
|
|
Other |
Prints a list of items allocated to other ie: expenses |
|
|
Other Reports |
|
|
|
New Client / Booking Form |
Prints a booking form that contains client, vehicle, service, vehicle availability and work authorisation details.
|
|
|
Technician Barcodes |
Print bar codes for sites scanning technicians onto jobs |
|
|
SMS Log |
Lists SMS messages sent for a selected period |
|
|
Graphs |
|
|
|
Income & Expenses |
Compares income and expenses in a graphic format for a selected period. |
Reports, Printing Statements: Statements can be printed for all clients with balances other than zero or for selected clients. Select the activities / create statements. Selecting outstanding will allow you to print statements for all clients with an outstanding balance. Choosing the selective option allows you to select individual or multiple clients you wish to print statements for. Selecting outstanding will initiate the print run, when selecting clients printing will initialise once the OK button is selected.
Reports, Printing: All reports are displayed to screen, to print double click on the print icon at the top of the screen. There maybe a short time delay as the report is prepared for printing, next select how many copies you wish to print from the windows print option.
Reports, Saving to PDF: Auto Easy allows you to save any report to a PDF File, when the report is displayed a PDF option can be accessed from the tool bar.
Selecting this function allows you to name and choose the location where you wish to store the file, it is then possible to print or attach to an email.
Reports, Export Function: All reports can be exported to Microsoft Excel, Lotus 123, RTF or text coma delimited format. To perform these tasks select the export function from the bottom of the report print preview screen. Select the export file type; enter the name of the file and destination directory. To view the export data open the appropriate program and view the file.
Selecting
this function from the top of the reports display allows you to export
the data in various commonly used formats.
|
To select an export format, click on the button to the right of the format field. Point and click on the required export file type which will now display in the format field. Complete the export process by selecting OK, naming your file and selecting the destination.
|
Fig13.02 Selecting The Export Format
Overview: Auto Easy allows the operator to forecast profit and loss account values by month for up to 12 months. It is then possible to compare the forecast with actual values and view the difference by account. It is suggested that operators wishing to use this feature forecast on a financial year basis, a copy option makes it easy to duplicate values for different periods.
Budgeting, Opening: Move your cursor to the top of the screen and select Admin, from the drop down menu point and click on the budgeting option. The display lists your profit and loss accounts, at the top of the budgeting screen are the following options:
Budgeting, Entering A forecast: Firstly select your starting month, next move to the year field point on the down arrow and highlight the year, finally move across to the forecast months, from the drop down selection choose the number of months you wish to include in your forecast.
To allocate a forecast value, point and click in the cell to the right of the account name, enter the value, use the down arrow key to move to the next cell, enter a value then continue down the column recording values against each account you wish to forecast.
Note: If you wish to cancel a value, type 00 into the field
|
As you enter values the totals are updated with the forecast net profit being adjusted accordingly. Only profit and loss accounts are displayed, enter values to accounts that you are posting to. The nil value accounts are not displayed when reporting. |
Fig 13.03 Entering Forecast Values
Budgeting, Copying And Pasting Values: You may wish to copy one months forecast to another, to perform this task point and click on the month title field of the values you wish to copy the column will highlight go to the top of the display, select copy, next highlight the column you wish to copy the data to and select paste, the column is populated with the copied values.
Budgeting, Reporting: Auto Easy allows you to run two report formats, one displays forecast values only the other compares forecast with actual values and variations, the other allows you to view the forecast values only. To run a report select the report option from the bottom of the screen.
The prompt requests whether you wish to display the actual values, choosing no will display only the forecast values, selecting yes prints the actual, forecast and variation values.
Fig 13.04 Comparing Actual and forecast results
To print the reports select the printer icon at the top left hand corner of the report display screen.
Special Functions, Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate provides you with direct internet connectivity, you are able to log onto the Internet from the on-line drop down menu. Once connected it is possible to upload and download data for support purposes you can even access the Genesis and Autorepairer web sites with a simple mouse click.
Internet, Accessing Functions: To access the Internet select the on-line option from the top of screen, the drop down menu contains the following options:
Genesis
Website:
Connects you directly to www.Genesis.com.au
Auto-repairer Web Site: Connects you directly to www.auto-repairer.com.au
Auto-update*: Genesis will advise you when program updates are available;
select this option to download the latest program from the Genesis server.
Upload Database*: Send your total database to Genesis if requested
by support personnel.
Download Database*: This selection allows for the import of your database
from Genesis support.
Replicate: Exports customer and vehicle records to the Genesis central
server for the generation of service reminders and roadside assistance
issues.
Capricorn Website: Connects you directly to www.capricorn.com.au
Capricorn Reconciliation: Initialises the Capricorn statement reconciliation
feature.
Fig 13.01 On-Line Menu |
Internet, Connecting: When selecting the Genesis, Autorepairer or Capricorn website options from the on-line menu your computer will initialise the dial up process and connect to your ISP. If however you are on-line when either of these options are selected the home page of each site will be displayed without initializing dial-up.
Internet, Auto-update: If on support you will be notified by Genesis when an update is available. Selecting this option will initialise a download, on completion your program will close and re-open in the new version.
Replicate: This feature allows you to send customer and vehicle information to the central server. On selection you will be connected to the Internet, your files zipped and transferred. If you wish to close your connection select yes when requested to log off.
Enable Communications: Allows Genesis support to connect with your PC.
|
Internet, Uploading / Downloading Database: You maybe requested by Genesis to transfer your data, to upload the total database select transfer database from the on-line menu. Your system will connect to the internet, a line gradually progresses across the message box indicating upload status. You are prompted when the upload is completed successfully.
|
To download data, select download database from transfer database, your system will connect to the internet and request you to overwrite your current database – select yes from the prompt, the database will download as a progress bar moves across the screen. On completion your application will close and re-open in the downloaded database.
|
Auto-Update, Accessing: To access the auto-update feature select the On-Line function from the top of screen, from the drop down menu select Auto-Update, a box (first access) will request whether you are updating via the Internet or from a directory on the LAN. If updating a network download the update file, the program will close and reopen in the new version. Perform the same procedure on each terminal except select the APUpdate directory from the Internet machine as the path directory which is APUpdate, Select Update now to complete the installation.
The auto-update feature allows you to update a single machine or a network via the Internet
Support Messages: On installation of 2.6.1 your site will be registered on the Genesis server which allows our support staff to communicate directly with a site through Auto Easy. This facility will primarily be used to enhance support procedures.
Receiving a message: Auto Easy when connected to the internet is constantly scanning for incoming messages, when a message is received it will be displayed on your screen.
|
When the OK option is selected the message is saved to the site messages list available from Lists / Site Messages. The stored messages can be read by clicking on the line. To delete a message simply highlight and select delete from the bottom of the list. |
Fig 13.03 – Accessing Site Messages
Application Support: Genesis support staff may request you allow access to your PC, to achieve this link Genesis uses a third party package – Cross Loop. The application is available from the support pages on the Genesis web site. When this application is loaded on selecting enable communications from the on-line menu Auto Easy will search for the Cross Loop executable (this may take a minute or two on the first use).
|
Function Overview: Genesis in conjunction with Auto Parts have developed an on-line facility that allows registered users to import bills directly to Auto Easy’s purchasing module. Line items included in these imports can be allocated to inventory or jobs as buy-ins. For this feature to operate you will need an internet connection plus your account has to be activated for data import via application to Auto Parts.
Set-up: To initialise your invoice retrieval feature select from the top menu bar File / Setup, point and click on the on-line tab. The invoice retrieval options are located on the bottom left hand side of the display.
|
Managing Imported Invoices: Imported bills are listed in your purchasing screen; the invoice number is displayed in blue, and once the invoice has been opened and closed the invoice number will be displayed in black indicting to the user that the transaction has been processed. It is suggested from an operational perspective that imported transactions are accessed and processed when the paper invoice is received. All items will be received as inventory unless the part number has already been allocated as a buy-in on the local system in which case it will retain the previous allocation. Version 261D and later allow for easy conversion of parts between buy-ins and inventory.
Fig 13.05 Switching Between Inventory & Buy-Ins |
To convert an inventory item to a buy-in (or visa versa) point and click on the line item, from the part form point and click on the button to the right of the type field, select the conversion option. Using the import process requires all buy-ins to be allocated to jobs from the purchasing module. |
Function Parameters Relating To Data Import: Catalogue or new items will be allocated to inventory – when a catalogue part existed before download the item is converted to inventory the cost is recorded in the part form however the sell if originally zero will remain with no value recorded..
When a duplicate reference number is found, the user is prompted with three possibilities:
a) Replace existing (automatically backing out previous data),
b) Keep existing and create a new record (with automatically created different reference number)
c) Keep existing and ignore new data. There is also a checkbox at the bottom of this form which you can check if you want to use the option you select for all duplicates in the current download (saving you from clicking the button for each and every invoice).
If a match is found from a new bill to an existing PO (this field is in the data), the link is created and the outstanding/received fields are populated accordingly.
Inventory items/Buy-ins can be interchanged from the part details form by selecting the button to the right of the type field.
Data Maintenance, Overview: It is important that you understand how to maintain and backup your data. We recommend that you back up your data at the end of each session. If you have more than one hard disk drive; backup onto a different drive from the one where you keep your working data. If you have only one hard disk drive, backup onto a USB Flash Drive, CDRW or Zip Disk. Remember that an important purpose for backing up data is to protect against a hard disk failure.
1) Each day, back up onto a removable media (ie: CD or Flash Drive) to store away from the office.
Note: The first time you do a daily backup, we suggest that if you are using zip disks or CDRW’s you make several sets of backup disks and label the each disk "Auto Easy Backup Monday," "Auto Easy Backup Tuesday,"
2) At least once a month, make a backup copy to keep permanently off your premises.
Note: For your monthly backups, you may want to alternate between two sets of media. If disaster strikes your office, you'll want to have a reliable record of your data to fall back on. Also, if one of the media items become damaged or fails you'll have another data set to fall back on.
3) At the end of your financial year, make an archive copy of your data to keep off your premises.
Data, Backup: Any program that stores critical data backing up the databases is extremely important. It is suggested that the data is backed up at least every working day with back up files being written to both the hard and removable drives. Floppy disks are not the most stable storage media for this reason it is suggested you use other media types such as a USB flash disk or CDRW. The removable media should be stored away from any electrical items or devices containing magnets of any kind. In the event of a hardware or software failure all data can be restored from the hard drive or backup disk.
Data, Backup Auto Selection: The automated backup feature is set from Settings / Program options
|
The backup process is automatically initialised on exiting the program. When backing up from a network drive only choose the option on the machine you wish to backup from, only the selected machine will prompt the backup process as the program closes. |
This feature allows you to nominate 2 drives for the backup to be written to. This is usually a directory on the hard drive plus a removable drive ie: USB Flash Disk or CD ROM. To chose the backup locations select the button to the right of the field; from the navigation window select the drive you wish to write to and click on OK (F12). Perform the same for the second location, when backing up to removable media you must ensure the drive is available before selecting the back-up option.
Back-Up Files: Auto Easy stores 5 back-up files in both the primary and secondary locations, the file names have a numeric extension ie: 2,3,4 and 5 when the sixth back-up is performed the least recent file is deleted. For those sites that have large databases ensure that you have enough storage on your removable media to store 5 back-up files. Storing multiple back-ups is a fail way of ensuring minimal data loss if your working data becomes corrupted and can’t be repaired.
Data, Backup Manual Selection: To backup the data while working in the program select file from the top of the screen. From the drop down menu select backup. Select the directory you wish to backup to, if overwriting a previous backup file you will be prompted to confirm your selection. A confirmation message follows if the backup was successful.
Data, Restoring: To restore data select file from the top of the screen. From the drop down menu select restore. Select the directory / file you wish to restore from, you are prompted to confirm your selection, select yes to restore.
Database, Optimisation: Over a period of time the databases can become fragmented and you may notice searches become a little slower. To overcome these problems it is suggested you run the repair and compact option from the file menu on a weekly basis, simply point and click on the selection to initialise. The utility will run and display a message on completion.
Integrity Check
This option is available from the file menu, it should be run if you suspect transactions have been corrupted in any way. Point and click on file from the drop down menu select Integrity check. If a transaction is found to be out of balance a prompt is displayed to fix the transaction select OK (F12).
Data Management, Creating A New Site: When opening Auto Easy for the first time you are requested to create a new or open an existing database. You are required to enter a site id (use 4 numerics, if you are on support Genesis will issue a unique number) and your trading name – This will become the name of your data file for that set of accounts. It is also possible to create a new site by selecting file / New site from the top menu bar.
There are three checkboxes in the body of the select database form; all are selected as a default. If you do not wish to import the standard chart of accounts, service
or parts listing uncheck the appropriate box. Next select the create new database option a window opens requesting the directory in which you wish to store the database. On installation a sub directory titled local is created we suggest you store all of your database files in this directory.
Note: Your database is named by the company you created ie: Delta Auto Repairs creates a database file titled Delta Auto Repairs, adb (adb is the database extension for all Auto Easy site files).
Database Management, Opening An Existing Site: Auto Easy is a multi-company program, which means you can manage multiple accounts from the single program. To open an existing database select either the open an existing database option from the select database form or click on open site from the file menu at the top of screen. Point and double click on the required site file, the program will load the selected database, and you will also notice that the path at the top of screen display has changed.
Fig 13.06 Database Path Indicating The Sample Company Is Selected
Training, Selecting Sample Company: When loading Auto Easy Ultimate a Sample company is installed in the C:\Program Files\Auto Easy Ultimate\Site directory it is suggested you select this file to use for training purposes. Select open site from the file menu, from the open site selection box point and click on AA Automotives Pty Ltd. The header located at the top of the screen will now indicate you are operating in the Sample Company.
Fig 13.07 Selecting An Existing Site Fig 13.04 Creating A New Site
Overview: Over a period of time your database will grow in size and you may begin to experience a slow down in overall performance of the program. To restore processing speed back to an acceptable level we suggest you use the archive option provided. Before you process your data through this utility you must be aware that certain transaction detail will no longer be available from your working database, for instance transaction reports run for an archived period will contain limited detail for this reason we suggest you give serious consideration to the cut off date for archiving.
Auto Easy does not allow you to archive data from the current financial year, your choices are limited to the last day of each financial year for which the data is valid. For instance it would not be advisable to archive data for the 2004 / 2005 financial year on the 1st. July 2005 as you will still require transaction detail to finalise your tax returns, once these are completed then you would be safe to archive data in the previous tax year.
To ensure there is no data loss the archiving process will automatically back-up your current data to an archive directory, this can be restored at anytime by using the archive restore option. Be aware that these archives will contain all data as it was up to the date and time the archive was created. No post archive data is written to these files.
Archiving Process: Click on File / Archiving
Fig 13.08 Archiving Selection
|
Fig 13.09 Selecting The Cut Off Date |
Auto Easy will only allow you to select an end of financial year date that is current for your data. Transactions after that data will not be affected by running the process. Select the archive button to run the utility
Before continuing please read the message displayed as the process is irreversible.
|
When you have selected which archive you wish to run you will be prompted to confirm your selection, point and click in the yes box provided and click on the word yes located on the bottom right hand side of the screen, processing will initialise. The time to complete the process will vary according to the size of your database; we display a red bar indicating the current status. On completion a message box will summarise the results of the archive.
Partial Archive
A partial archive reduces the size of the transaction data, all sales history is retained however after a partial archive it is not possible to run detailed general ledger reports as this data no longer exists. A partial archive will speed performance for small to medium sized databases, however it maybe necessary to run a full archive to maximise the performance of a large database
Fig 13.10 Archiving Complete Message |
The message displays the path and file name of the archive, how many transactions where affected and how many remain. We also display a percentage reduction value ie: in the example 98.33%. To finalise click on OK.
To summarise what processes have occurred:
1) Your pre archive data has been saved to an archive directory date and time stamped – This can be restored and viewed at anytime. 2) Transactions been summarised and deleted from your data files to reduce the overall size. Having less data will improve access speed. |
Full Archive
It is suggested that to optimize performance for a large database a full archive is performed, be aware that all data prior to the archive date will be removed. Transactions are summarised to maintain general ledger integrity. A full archive is only required if data access times have become unacceptable.
Restoring Archived Files: Auto Easy gives you the option to restore archived files. This can only be done by using the restore archive option in the file menu. On selection you will be prompted to select the file you wish to view from the archive directory. The files are date and time stamped. Select the file you wish to restore and click on the open option, the file will automatically restore to the archive directory.
Fig 13.08 Choosing The Archive You Wish To Restore
On restoration you will notice that the name of the file remains date and time stamped and always has an aar extension so you do not confuse an archived database with your working data.
The restored data will have all transaction detail in tact and you will be able to run reports to view detail.
To return to your working database click on open site, select the site menu from the drop down selections, point and click on your data file name and select open from the bottom of the screen.
Fig 13.09 Selecting The Site Directory To Open the Working Database
Overview: Genesis has developed a set-up procedure that loads specified data onto the local machine enforcing category and vehicle management according to standard databases provided. It is important that the operator uses wherever possible the category, part and vehicle listings loaded by the parent organisation to ensure data integrity is maintained. The setting allows the local machine to replicate the database with a central server via a direct SQL connection over the internet. Replication can be set to either automatic or manual mode. The following documentation gives an overview of how the features should be used.
Note: Do not select the option unless instructed by Genesis or Personnel
Set-up Procedure: When creating the new database ensure you enter the correct site identification as provided by . Open the program; select File / Settings from the top of the screen the site detail form will be displayed select the button to the right of the organisation field. Point and click on .
Fig 14.01 Selecting As The Organisation
To save the new setting select
the OK button located on the bottom right hand corner of the display.
You will now be asked to confirm your selection, if you wish to continue
select the yes button from the bottom right hand corner of the message
box.
Fig 14.02 Confirmation Message |
Selecting yes from confirmation screen will connect your PC to an internet server (if you are not on broadband your machine will auto dial and connect to your service provider). When connection is established the database will be downloaded to the local machine. Status of the download is indicated by a progress bar. Once the files have been downloaded successfully the program will automatically update the local machine
|
The update process performs four passes on the database, categories, services, suppliers and parts. When the process is complete a message is displayed, if you are using a dial up connection you are prompted to hang up select yes if you wish to go off line. To return to the program desktop select OK (F12) from the bottom right hand corner of the settings display.
Categories, Viewing: It is suggested that you familiarise yourself with the categories that have been loaded from the database. To view the list select lists / categories from the top of screen, the categories are grouped into the following:
v Parts
v Services
v Suppliers
Fig 14.03 Viewing The Category Listing |
It is not possible to edit the specific categories for any of the groups, however new categories can be entered if required. It is suggested that wherever possible you apply the category to parts, services and suppliers. To search for a category select either the category or grouping column by pointing and clicking on the header record. Enter text into the search field; the cursor will highlight the required record. If you are searching by keyword select the double arrows to the right of the field the cursor will cycle through all fields with that entry.
|
Category Listing
Parts |
|
|
|
Accessories/Misc. Parts |
|
|
|
|
Accessories |
|
Starter Motors & Parts |
|
Body Hardware |
|
Switches & Sensors |
|
Bonnet/hatch Struts |
Engines & Components |
|
|
Wiper & Washer Parts |
|
All Other Parts |
All Other Parts |
|
|
Balancers & Oil Pumps |
|
All Other Parts |
|
Engine Bearings |
Braking & Components |
|
|
Engine Mountings |
|
All Other Parts |
|
Gaskets & Seals |
|
Brake Cables |
|
Motors & Cylinder Heads |
|
Brake Calipers & Parts |
|
Oil Filters |
|
Brake Hoses |
|
Pistons & Rings |
|
Brake Shoes & Drums |
|
Timing Components |
|
Disc Pads & Disc Rotors |
|
Fast Parts |
|
Master Cyl & Parts |
|
Brake & Clutch |
|
Pedal Pads |
|
Service Parts |
|
Wheel Cyls & Parts |
|
Suspension/driveline |
|
Electrical Components |
|
Tune Up |
|
All Other Parts |
Fuel & Exhaust |
|
|
Alternators & Parts |
|
Air & Fuel Filters |
|
Batteries |
|
All Other Parts |
|
Distributors & Parts |
|
Carby & Efi Parts |
|
Flashers & Relays |
|
Exhaust Systems |
|
Globes & Lights |
|
Fuel Caps |
|
H/lamps,lights-lens |
|
Fuel Pumps & Parts |
|
Ignition Coil/e.c.units |
|
|
|
Spark Plug Leads |
|
|
|
Spark Plugs |
|
|
Heating & Cooling |
|
|
|
|
Air Cond & Heating |
|
Manual Gearbox Oil |
|
Fan Belts & Pulleys |
Susp,steering,drivel |
|
|
Fan Clutches & Fans |
|
All Other Parts |
|
Hoses: Radiator & Miscl. |
|
Diff & Hub Parts |
|
Miscellaneous Parts |
|
Oil Seals |
|
Radiators & Caps |
|
Shock Absorbers & Struts |
|
Temp.senders & Switch |
|
Steering Parts |
|
Thermostats & Housings |
|
Suspension Bushes |
|
Water Pumps & Parts |
|
Suspension Parts/springs |
Oil & Chemicals |
|
|
Uni`s/cv`s/centre Brgs |
|
Additives Oil/fuel |
|
Wheel Bearings/seals |
|
Additives Radiator |
Transmission & Clutch |
|
|
Additives Screen |
|
All Other Parts |
|
Adhesives |
|
Auto Transmission & Kits |
|
Brakes |
|
Auto Transmission Parts |
|
Grease |
|
Clutch Kits |
|
Lubricant/penetrant |
|
Clutch/spigot Bush/brgs |
|
Oil |
|
Covers Assy`s & Plates |
Oils,fluids,coolants |
|
|
Hydraulic Clutch Parts |
|
Auto Transmission Fluid |
|
Manual Gearbox & Kits |
|
Engine Coolant |
|
Manual Gearbox Parts |
|
Engine Oil |
|
Pedal Pads |
|
|
|
|
Services |
|
|
|
|
Airconditioning |
|
Labour |
|
Automatic Transmission |
|
Major Services |
|
Brake |
|
Minor & Lubrication |
|
Carbon Clean |
|
Log Book |
|
Surcharges |
|
Roadworthy Certificates |
|
EPA |
|
Roadside Assistance |
|
Cooling System |
|
Steering & Suspension |
|
Diagnostic |
|
Exhaust |
|
Tuning |
|
|
Suppliers |
|
|
|
|
Holden dealership |
|
Other dealership |
|
Ford dealership |
|
Spare parts supplier |
|
Toyota dealership |
|
Expense item supplier |
Categories, Printing: It is possible to print a list of categories from Auto Easy Ultimate by selecting Reports / Other Reports / Category list from the top of the screen. The report lists all categories by part, supplier and service groups.
Categories, Removing From View: You are unable to delete or hide specified categories, however other records can be hidden by opening the category form from the category list (point and double click on the record or highlight and select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display) and ticking the hidden box.
Overview: When your organisation has been set to certain rules apply to the allocation of categories for suppliers, parts and services. It is not possible to finalise a sale without parts and services being allocated to a category. Once a category has been assigned to a part or service record there is no need to re-allocate the record. Your system contains over 3,000 parts from the catalogue that have the correct categories already assigned it is suggested that wherever possible these records should be used.
Categories, Applying To Parts: From the parts listing select the part you wish to assign a category to. Double click on the line item or highlight and select edit (F2) from the bottom of the list. Select the button to the right of the category field, your category list is now in view, search for the required record highlight and select OK(F12) to insert onto the part form. Select OK(F12) from the bottom of the part form to save the record change.
Fig 22.04 Selecting A Category From The Part Form
Categories, Applying To Parts From The Job Card: It is possible to enter parts or services that have not been assigned a category onto a job card, cash sale or charge invoice, however you will be prompted to enter a category on finalising the entry. The assigned category is recorded on the service and part forms and will not require any subsequent assignment.
Fig 14.05 Applying A Category From The Job Card |
To assign a category select the button at the end of the line item, the category list will display, search for the required category, highlight and select OK(F12) the record is enter in the list. Perform the same task for subsequent services or parts in the display, when complete select the done button to save.
|
Categories, Applying To Services: A service listing has been loaded onto your machine the name, code and categories are listed in the following table. It is however possible to create a new service and apply a category. From the service listing select the new button at the bottom of the display complete the fields as required selecting the button to the right of the category field will display the services category list, highlight the record you wish to apply and save by selecting OK(F12) from the bottom of the category display.
Fig 14.06 Apply A Category To The Service Form
If a service that has not been assigned a category is applied to a job card a prompt will display requesting a category be entered.
Standard Services
Service Name |
Code |
Category |
Air Conditioning Service |
ACS |
Airconditioning |
Automatic Transmission Flush |
ATF |
Automatic Transmission |
Disc Brake Service - Front |
DBSF |
Brake |
Drum Brake Service - Rear |
DRBSR |
Brake |
Brake System Flush |
BSF |
Brake |
Drum Brake Service - Front |
DRBSF |
Brake |
Disc Pad Replacement - Front |
DPRF |
Brake |
Brake Shoe Replacement |
BSR |
Brake |
Disc Brake Service - Rear |
DBSR |
Brake |
Brake Disc Machine |
BDM |
Brake |
Disc Pad Replacement - Rear |
DPRF |
Brake |
Wheel Cylinder Replacement |
WCR |
Brake |
Carbon Clean Fuel Injector Service |
CCFI |
Carbon Clean |
Carbon Clean Diesel Injector Service |
CCDI |
Carbon Clean |
Comm. Vehicle Surcharge |
CVS |
Surcharges |
Surcharge Fixed Price (specify) |
SUR |
Surcharges |
Cooling System Service |
CSS |
Cooling System |
Engine Diagnosis Carburettor |
EDC |
Diagnostic |
Efi Engine Diagnosis |
EFID |
Diagnostic |
Efi System Clean |
EFISC |
Tuning |
Hi-tech Tune 4 Cyl. |
CT4 |
Tuning |
Hi-tech Tune 6 Cyl. |
CT6 |
Tuning |
Hi-tech Tune 8 Cyl. |
CT8 |
Tuning |
Efi Hi Tech Tune 4 Cyl. |
EFIT4 |
Tuning |
Efi Hi Tech Tune 6 Cyl. |
EFIT6 |
Tuning |
Efi Hi Tech Tune 8 Cyl. |
EFIT8 |
Tuning |
Efi Major Service |
EFIMJ |
Major Services |
Major Service |
MJS |
Major Services |
Four Wheel Drive Major Service |
4WDMJ |
Major Services |
Minor Service |
MS |
Minor & Lubrication |
Efi Minor Service |
EFIMS |
Minor & Lubrication |
Lube Service & Filter Efi |
EFILUBE |
Minor & Lubrication |
Lubrication Service |
LUBE |
Minor & Lubrication |
Four Wheel Drive Minor Service |
4WDMS |
Minor & Lubrication |
Power Steering Flush |
PSF |
Minor & Lubrication |
Log Book Service 30,000km |
LB030K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 150,000km |
LB150K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 100,000km |
LB100K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 10,000km |
LB010K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 40,000km |
LB040K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 80,000km |
LB080K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 90,000km |
LB090K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 20,000km |
LB020K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 140,000km |
LB140K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 120,000km |
LB120K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 60,000km |
LB060K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 70,000km |
LB070K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 110,000km |
LB110K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 130,000km |
LB130K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 50,000 Km |
LB050K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 15,000km |
LB015K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 45,000km |
LB045K |
Log Book |
Log Book Service 160,000km |
LB160K |
Log Book |
Rego Check Passenger Vehicle |
REGOPV |
Roadworthy Certificates |
Rego Check Trailer No Brakes |
REGOT |
Roadworthy Certificates |
Rego Check Trailer Brakes |
REGOTB |
Roadworthy Certificates |
Lp Gas Certificate |
LGC |
Roadworthy Certificates |
Roadside Assistance Issue |
RSAISS |
Roadside Assistance |
Wheel Alignment |
WA |
Steering & Suspension |
Shock Absorber Replacement |
SAR |
Steering & Suspension |
Exhaust General Repairs |
EGR |
Exhaust |
Exhaust Muffler Replacement |
EMR |
Exhaust |
The operator should use wherever possible services from the standard listing, if new services are created they should be assigned to service categories as per the above table.
Categories, Applying To Suppliers: Major supplier names have been added to your supplier listing these include:
|
There is no need to apply categories to these records as they are pre-assigned. It is important that you select these suppliers when purchasing parts, do not create suppliers with duplicate names (the system will warn you if this is attempted). To add a supplier category select the supplier from the list point and click to open the supplier form or select edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Select the button to the right of the category field highlight the required record and save by selecting OK(F12). Save the supplier record by selecting OK(F12) from the bottom of the form. |
Fig 14.07 Applying A Category To A Supplier Record
Overview: A database containing vehicle make / model / series / engine type and manufacture dates has been loaded into your program. It is possible to add new vehicle to the listing, however wherever practical the listing should be used. Settings do not allow you to create a job card unless the make / mode / series / engine type and manufacture date and year have been completed. Auto Easy will prompt you to select the necessary records from the listings provided.
Vehicle Makes & Models, Viewing: To view the make and model listing select Lists / Makes & Models from the top of the screen.
Vehicle Makes & Models, Adding To The Vehicle Record: Vehicles entered prior to configuring the program to will be retained in the vehicle file including the original make / model and manufacture dates. When creating a booking you will be prompted to add the required information to the vehicle form. New vehicle records the same rules apply the make / model / series / engine type and manufacture dates must be entered otherwise you will be unable to save the record.
Fig 14.08 Vehicle Data Incomplete Warning |
A warning message is displayed when job cards are created for vehicles that have incomplete details; selecting OK will open the vehicle record with the required fields highlighted in yellow
|
Fig 14.09 Selecting Vehicle Details From The Vehicle Form
Point and click on the button to the right hand of the fields highlighted in yellow, select the make / model / series / engine type from the drop down box. The lists are indexed, typing COM for instance will highlight commodore in the model list point and click to insert. In the date and year fields select from the grid provided save the vehicle record by selecting OK(F12) from the bottom of the form.
Make & Model Adding To The Database: Adding a new record to the make & model database can be performed in two ways.
1)
Vehicle
Form – Type the make / model / series / engine type into the required
fields, select add a message will prompt you to confirm your selection,
the make / model form is displayed, complete the manufacture from / to
fields and save by selecting OK(F12).
2) Make & Model Listing – Select Lists / Make & Model from the top of the screen, from the listing select new to display the make & model form. Complete the details and save by selecting OK(F12)
Fig 14.10 Make & Model Form
Overview: Auto Easy Ultimate has the ability to replicate with a central database via a dial-up or broadband internet connection. require the local database to be replicated on a daily basis, to simplify this process your program can be set to perform this task automatically. It is suggested that you are working on-line when the replication is initiated, however if this is not possible Auto Easy will access your dial-up networking settings and connect with your service provider.
Replication, Enabling: To enable replication select File / Settings from the top of the screen, your site details are displayed. Point and click on the replication tab, tick the box labeled Enable Replication On This Machine. Follow these steps:
Select Automatic if you will be working on-line when the replication is to occur. If you need to connect to the internet select Manual.
Click on the button to the right of the type field to
access the options
Fig 14.11 Selecting Replication Type
Automatic Set-up
Fig 14.12 Automatic Replication Settings |
Frequency: Click on the button to the right of the field and select daily from the options list. Time: A time grid is displayed when the button to the right of this field is selected, choose the time you wish the replication process to occur each day by pointing and double clicking on the time. |
Manual Set-up
Fig 14.13 Manual Replication Settings |
Prompt: Click on this selection, a prompt will be displayed at the time requested including an option to go on-line. Selection will initiate a dial-up to your service provider, transfer data and prompt you to go off-line. Frequency: Click on the button to the right of the field and select daily from the options list. Time: A time grid is displayed when the button to the right of this field is selected, choose the time you wish the replication process to occur each day by pointing and double clicking on the time.
|
To save your settings select OK(F12) from the bottom right hand corner of the display. Genesis personnel will advise you on how to set-up the replication process. It is suggested that once these settings are entered that the operator does not make any changes unless advised.
Equipment Maintenance Register
Overview: The equipment maintenance register allows you to track scheduled equipment maintenance based on a regular service cycle including the ability to record if the scheduled task has occurred.
Auto Easy also allows you to record maintenance check-lists for regular servicing, the register is linked to the task manager giving you the ability to set reminders at a certain date and time, once a service has been completed the next date of service is entered automatically based on the cycle recorded.
The equipment maintenance register is accessible from your chart of accounts by prompting whether you wish to add an item being recorded as a fixed asset to the register with the ability to establish a service cycle with check-lists and reminders if required.
Equipment Maintenance Register, Accessing: To access the maintenance register select Activities from the top menu, point and double click on the Equipment Maintenance Register option displayed on the drop down menu, the main screen listing all scheduled maintenance is in view.
Fig 14.19 Selecting From Activities |
The register can also be accessed from your chart of accounts. You will automatically be prompted to add an item to the equipment maintenance register when recording an entry as a fixed asset. If you wish to set a service schedule and reminders for the new plant or equipment select yes when prompted to open the equipment form. On completion the entry is automatically recorded in the register displaying the next date of service and whether a task has been established. |
|
Fig 14.14 Entering A Fixed Asset |
Fig 14.21 Selecting To Add An Item To The Register | |
|
|
|
Equipment Maintenance Register, Entering A New Item: A new item can be entered by selecting yes when prompted from the chart accounts or by selecting new from the bottom of the register display. Both these selections will open the equipment form.
Fig 14.15 The Equipment Form |
The equipment form allows you enter the equipment description ie: Tyre Changer, manufacturers serial number, the maintenance type, frequency can be selected from a drop down menu, the next date of service is automatically recorded based on last date service was completed plus the frequency selected. |
Initially the next service date is established by selecting the Task option from the bottom of the display. The Maintenance Task form allows you to establish who is going to be reminded of the task and when, enter any check-lists and make notes if applicable.
Fig 14.16 Maintenance Task |
To select the person user type you wish to be reminded when the task is due point and click on the down arrow to the right of the for field. A list of users and user types is displayed in the drop down menu select the group or user by pointing and double clicking on your selection. Enter the due date into the Due field by clicking on the button to the right and selecting from the calendar displayed, next select a time from the table. If you wish to be reminded point and click in the check-box select the arrow to the right of the Remind field point and double click on your selection from the drop down menu. The repeat field will automatically display the service cycle entered onto the equipment form. If this has not yet been recorded select the arrow to the right of the Repeat field make your selection from the drop down menu. If you wish to add a checklist to the maintenance task select the button to the right of the Checklist field. |
|
Fig 14.24 Selecting The User |
Fig 14.25 When To Be Reminded |
Maintenance Task, Adding A Checklist: Auto Easy allows you to store multiple checklists and attach a predetermined list to a maintenance task. The checklist is accessed by selecting the button to the right of the checklist field. You recorded checklist titles are displayed, to attach a checklist to a task highlight the entry and double click of select OK (F12) from the bottom of the list.
Fig 14.17 Adding A Checklist To The Maintenance Task |
Checklists are made up of lines of text that are numbered; when a checklist is selected it becomes part of the task. The checks are displayed on the right hand of the task form when the Complete option is selected. The individual checklist items can be ticked as completed by pointing and clicking in the checkbox next to the text. It is also possible to print the checklist by selecting the Checklist option from the bottom of the form. |
|
Fig 14.18 Checklist Display On The Task Form |
| |
|
|
|
Equipment Maintenance Register, Creating Checklists: To create a new checklist go to the select a checklist display and perform the following:
1) Select New from the bottom of the list
2) The checklist details form is displayed, to add an item select Add
3) Type the line text into the checklist item box and save with OK(F12)
4) Repeat item 3 for each line of the checklist to save the checklist select OK(F12)
Fig 14.19 Checklist Details Display |
Checklists, Editing & Moving Text: Edit functions allow you to make changes to the checklist text by highlighting the line and double clicking or selecting edit (F2) from the bottom of the display. Make your changes to the text in the checklist item box and save using OK (F12). It is also possible to re-order the line items by highlighting the check you wish to move and clicking on the up and down arrows to the right of the display. To delete a line highlight and select the remove function. |
|
Fig 14.20 Completing A Task |
Tasks, Completing: To complete a task select the complete option from the bottom of the maintenance task form, checklist (if attached) and completion notes are now visible. Note: Tasks can be selected from either the Maintenance register or directly from the task manager. To open point and double click on the line entry. Maintenance tasks are identified in the task list on the left hand side of the task manager.
| |
|
|
|
The tt
To confirm completion of an item within a checklist point and click on the line a tick will be displayed in the checkbox. Enter your completion notes and save by selecting OK (F12).
Note: The task will always be completed by the current logged on user, the date and time is recorded as the form is saved.
Task Reminders, Pop Ups: authorised users can set tasks to display pop up reminders, these are messages that are displayed at a set time before a task is due (set from the task form).
Fig 14.21 Task Reminder |
There are four options available from the task reminder. Firstly you can reset the remind again period by pointing and clicking on the arrow to the right on the field and selecting a new time period from the list. |
Secondly you can select the snooze option that will remove the reminder from the screen for the time displayed in the remind again field. You can dismiss (cancel) the reminder by selecting the dismiss option. Finally if you wish to view / edit the task details select the details option.
Fig 14.22 Equipment Maintenance Register Main Screen
Equipment Maintenance Register, Editing An Entry: To edit a task go the equipment maintenance register or task manager and select the task make the necessary changes to the task and save with OK (F12)
Equipment Maintenance Register, Deleting An Entry: The task reminder can be deleted from the task manager by pointing and highlighting the entry and selecting the delete key on your keyboard. If you wish to delete an entry from the Equipment Maintenance screen highlight and select the delete option from the bottom of the display.
Overview: The incident register allows you to record of actions taken when an incident occurs, this could take the form of an employee warning, vehicle accident, client complaint, environmental issues or a client complaint. The register provides you with a detailed report and the ability to attach actions in the form of notes or tasks to an incident.
The incident register is linked to the task manager so you can setup reminders for tasks relating to specified incidents to ensuring they are performed. All entries in are date and time stamped, an incident can be finalised and a detailed report produced giving the incident details and a list of actions taken.
The module is extremely useful if you require an audit tool that document actions relating to an incident in a logical easily referenced format.
Incident Register, Accessing: To access the incident register select Activities from the top of the screen, point and click on the Incident Register option displayed on the bottom of the drop down menu. The main screen is displayed.
Fig 14.23 Incident Register
Incident, Creating A New Entry: To open a new incident click on the New option at the bottom of the display window, the incident report form will open. It is advisable that you complete all relevant details on this form; many of the options are checkboxes to select these items point at the box and mouse click a tick is displayed.
Fig 14.24 Selecting Incident Type |
The incident type field contains a drop down pick list, to access point and click on the arrow to the right of the field. Make your selection by pointing and clicking on the option required, your choice is displayed in the incident type window. The incident type in displayed in the main register screen. |
To save the form select OK (F12) from the bottom of the form. The incident will is displayed on your incident register screen with an open status. Selecting the action plan option will take you back to the incident summary from here you can create notes or a task.
Fig 14.25 Incident Report Form
Incident Register, Adding A Note: Point and click on the line item from the register, the incident summary form is in view, this form lists by date and time notes and tasks recorded against the incident to add a note select the Note: Clicking on the Action Plan button will open the incident summary from here you can enter notes and tasks.
|
Fig 14.26 Adding A Note To An Incident
Give your note a title, enter your text into the body of the form, select the arrow to the right of the contact method field, point and click on the contact type ie: Letter. Save your note by selecting OK (F12). The created by and created on fields will automatically display today’s date and time and the identity of the logged on user.
Incident Register, Adding A Task: Select the Task option from the bottom of the incident summary list, this action displays the task form.
Fig 14.27 Incident Task |
To select the person user type you wish to be reminded when the task is due point and click on the down arrow to the right of the for field. A list of users and user types is displayed in the drop down menu select the group or user by pointing and double clicking on your selection. Enter the due date into the Due field by clicking on the button to the right and selecting from the calendar displayed, next select a time from the table. If you wish to be reminded point and click in the check-box select the arrow to the right of the Remind field point and double click on your selection from the drop down menu. If you wish to repeat the task on a regular basis select the Repeat option, select the arrow to the right of the field and make your selection from the drop down menu.
To add a Checklist select the button to the right of the Checklist field. This action opens your list of checks to insert highlight the entry and confirm with OK (F12) the checklist title is now displayed in the checklist field. To create a new checklist select new from the bottom of the checklist display and add your line items, adjust order if required and save with OK (F12). |
Incident Register, Completing A Task: To complete a task, selection can be made from either the Incident Summary list or task list from the task manager. Point and click on the line item, select the complete option, mark the individual checks as completed (if attached) make your notes in the field provided and save with OK (F12).
Incident Register, Editing a Task or Note: Tasks or notes can be edited from the incident summary screen by pointing and clicking on the line item, executing the changes and saving with OK (F12). An incident task can also be accessed for editing from the task manager, again point and click on the line item, make your changes and save with OK (F12).
Incident Register, Deleting A Task Or Note: To delete an item from the incident summary highlight the line item and select delete from the bottom of the display, confirm your intention when prompted. If you delete a task from the incident summary it will also be removed from the task manager. To delete a task from the task manager highlight and select the delete key on your keyboard, confirm your intent when prompted. The task will also be deleted from the Incident summary.
Incidence Register, Task Reminders: There are four options available from the task reminder. Firstly you can reset the remind again period by pointing and clicking on the arrow to the right on the field and selecting a new time period from the list. Secondly you can select the snooze option that will remove the reminder from the screen for the time displayed in the remind again field.
Fig 14.28 Task Reminder Generated From The Register |
You can dismiss (cancel) the reminder by selecting the dismiss option. Finally if you wish to view / edit the task details select the details option.
|
Incident Register, Closing An Incident: When all notes and tasks are completed for a particular incident it is necessary to close the report. Highlight the incident; select the Close option from the bottom of the Incident Summary display, confirm your action by selecting yes from the close incident prompt.
Fig 14.29 Close Incident Prompt |
Note: Once closed no changes can be made to any of the documentation related to the incident.
Security: For a user to have access to the incident register the option incident register option must be selected in the security profile. |
Incident Report, Printing: The incident report is printed from the Incident Summary screen. Highlight the incident you wish to report on and select the Print option from the bottom of the display.
In addition to the original details entered when the incident was created a list of tasks and notes are printed.
Incident Register, Deleting An Incident: To delete an incident highlight the record from the Incident Register screen, select Delete from the bottom of the display, confirm your intention when prompted.